Перевод: со всех языков на английский

с английского на все языки

places under his command

  • 1 attribuō (adt-)

        attribuō (adt-) uī, ūtus, ere    [ad + tribuo], to assign, allot, make over: his (gladiatoribus) equos, Cs.: legioni equites, Cs.: cui sit Apulia attributa (as a province): huic Rutilum, places under his command, Cs.: pecuniam redemptori: pecunia attributa, numerata est.—To give in charge, commit, confide, intrust: nos trucidandos Cethego: ei sacra omnia, L. — Fig., to confer, bestow, assign, give: quem (timorem) mihi natura attribuit: curam Flaminio, L.—To attribute, ascribe, impute: si uni attribuenda culpa sit: alqd litteris.— To add: ad amissionem amicorum miseriam.

    Latin-English dictionary > attribuō (adt-)

  • 2 ἐπί

    ἐπί, Thess. (before τ)
    A

    ἐτ IG9(2).517.14

     (iii B. C.), Prep. with gen., dat., and acc., to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.
    A WITH GEN.:
    I of Place,
    1 with Verbs of Rest, upon,

    καθέζετ' ἐ. θρόνου Il.1.536

    ;

    ἧστο.. ὑψοῦ ἐπ' ἀκροτάτης κορυφῆς 13.12

    ;

    ἐ. πύργου ἔστη 16.700

    ;

    κεῖται ἐ. χθονός 20.345

    : without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ' ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (sc. σταθέντα)

    ἐλήλατο 10.153

    ; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ' ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, 1.46; ἐ. γῆς, opp. ὑπὸ γῆς, Pl.Lg. 728a: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ' ἵππων on our chariot, Il.24.356;

    οὐκ ἂν ἐφ' ὑμετ έρων ὀχέων.. ἵκεσθον 8.455

    ;

    ἄγαγε.. δῶρ' ἐπ' ἀπήνης 24.447

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῆς ἁμάξης.. ὠχέετο Hdt.1.31

    ;

    ἐπὶ τῶν ἵππων ὀχεῖσθαι X.Cyr.4.5.58

    ;

    οὓς κῆρες φορέουσι.. ἐ. νηῶν Il.8.528

    ;

    πέμπειν τινὰς ἐ. τριήροιν X.HG5.4.56

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ὤμου.. φέρειν Od.10.170

    ; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ' ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, Numen. ap. Eus.PE14.7; βαδιοῦνται ἐ. δυοῖν σκελοῖν, ἐφ' ἑνὸς πορεύσονται σκέλους, Pl.Smp. 190d; ἐπ' ἄκρων ὁδοιπορεῖν walk on tiptoe, S.Aj. 1230; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support,

    νέρθε κἀπὶ γῆς ἄνω Id.OT 416

    ; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, X.An.1.8.9,3.2.36; but most freq., in, rarely in Hom., ἐπ' ἀγροῦ in the country. Od. 1.190;

    γᾶς ἐ. ξένας S.OC 1705

     (lyr.);

    νήσου τῆσδ' ἐφ' ἧς ναίει Id.Ph. 613

    ;

    ἐ. ξένας δμωῒς ἐπ' ἀλλοτρίας πόλεος E.Andr. 137

     (lyr.);

    οἱ ἐ. Θρᾴκης σύμμαχοι Th.5.35

    ;

    τοὺς ἐ. τῆς Ἀσίας κατοικοῦντας Isoc.12.103

    ; ἐπ' οἰκήματος κατίσαι, καθῆσθαι, in a brothel, Hdt.2.121.έ, Pl. Chrm. 163b;

    τοὺς ἐ. τῶν οἰκημάτων καθεζομένους Aeschin.1.74

    ;

    ἐ. τῶν ἐργαστηρίων καθίζειν Isoc.7.15

    ; μένειν ἐ. τῆς αὐτῶν (sc. χώρας ) remain in statu quo, Indut. ap. Th.4.118;

    οἱ ἐπ' ἐρημίας λῃστεύοντες Jul. Or.7.210a

    ; later of towns,

    ἐπ' Ἀλεξανδρείας BGU908.16

     (ii A.D.), etc.; sts. also, at or near, ἐπ' αὐτάων (sc. τῶν πηγῶν) Il.22.153;

    κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Ποσιδηΐου Hdt.7.115

    ; αἱ ἐ. Λήμνου ἐπικείμεναι νῆσοι off Lemnos, ib.6 codd.; τὰ ἐ. Θρᾴκης the Thrace- ward region, Th.1.59, cf. IG12.45.17, etc.; ποταμοὶ ἐφ' ὧν ἔξεστιν ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι.. on, i.e. near which.., X.An.2.5.18; ἐ. τῶν τραπεζῶν at the money-changers' tables, Pl.Ap. 17c; in Geom., αἱ ἐφ' ὧν AA BB [ γραμμαί] the lines AA BB, Arist.EN 1132b6, etc.; ἕλιξ ἐφ' ἇς τὰ ΑΒΓΔ a spiral ABCD, Archim.Spir.13 (cf. B.1.1k); also ἐ. τοῦ βάτου in the passage concerning the bush, Ev.Marc.12.26.
    2 in various relations not strictly local, μένειν ἐ. τῆς ἀρχῆς remain in the command, X.Ages.1.37; μένειν ἐ. τινος abide by it, D.4.9; ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων, ἐ. τοῦ πολεμεῖν εἶναι, to be engaged in.., Id.15.11, Prooem.1; ἐ. ὀνόματος εἶναι bear a name, Id.39.21;

    ἔχεται πόλις ἐ. νόσου S.Ant. 1141

     (lyr.).
    b of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ' ἀγκύρας ride at (i.e. in dependence upon an) anchor, Hdt.7.188; ἐ. προσπόλου μιᾶς χωρεῖν dependent upon an attendant, S.OC 746.
    c with the personal and reflexive Pron., once in Hom.,

    εὔχεσθε.. σιγῇ ἐφ' ὑμείων Il.7.195

    ; later mostly with [ per.] 3rd pers., ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν κεῖσθαι by themselves, Hdt.2.2, cf. 8.32;

    οἰκέειν κώμην Id.5.98

    ;

    ἐ. σφῶν αὐτῶν αὐτόνομοι οἰκεῖν Th.2.63

    ;

    ἵζεσθαι Hdt.9.17

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν πλεῖν Th.8.8

    ; ἐπ' ὑμέων αὐτῶν βαλέσθαι consider it by yourselves, Hdt.3.71, etc.;

    αὐτὴ ἐφ' αὑτῆς σκοποῦσα Th.6.40

    ;

    ἐφ' ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τὸν ἐξετασμὸν ποιεῖσθαι D.18.16

    ; ἐπ' ἑωυτῶν διαλέγονται speak in a dialect of their own, Hdt. 1.142; also

    αὐτοὶ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν χωρεῖν X. An.2.4.10

    ;

    πράττειν Pl.Prt. 326d

    , cf. Sph. 217c; τὸ ἐφ' ἑαυτῶν μόνον προορώμενοι considering their own interest only, th.1.17.
    d with numerals, to denote the depth of a body of soldiers, ἐ. τεττάρων ταχφῆναι to be drawn up four deep, four in file, X.An.1.2.15, etc.; ἐ. πεντήκοντα ἀσπίδων συνεστραμμένοι, of the Thebansat Leuctra, Id.HG 6.4.12; ἐπ' ὀλίγων τεταγμένοι, i.e. in a long thin line, Id.An.4.8.11;

    οὐκ ἐπ' ὀλίγων ἀσπίδων στρατιὰν παρατεταγμένην Th.7.79

    ; ἐφ' ἑνὸς ἄγειν in single file, X.Cyr.2.4.2, cf. An.5.2.6; rarely of the length of the line,

    ἐ. τεσσάρων ταξάμενοι τὰς ναῦς Th.2.90

    ; in X.,

    ἐγένοντο τὸ μέτωπον ἐ. τριακοσίων.. τὸ δὲ βάθος ἐφ' ἑκατόν Cyr.2.4.2

    ; πλεῖν ἐ. κέρως, ἐ. κέρας, v. infr. c.1.3; ἐ. φάλαγγος γίγνεται τὸ στράτευμα is formed in column, An.4.6.6, etc. (but in E.Ph. 1467, ἀσπίδων ἔπι is merely in or under arms): hence, generally, ἐ. ὀκτὼ πλίνθων τὸ εὖρος eight bricks wide, X.An.7.8.14.
    e c. gen. pers., before, in presence of,

    ἐ. μαρτύρων.. πράσσεταί τι Antipho 2.3.8

    ;

    ἐξελέγχεσθαι ἐ. πάντων D.25.36

    ; so, before a magistrate or official,

    ἐ. τοῦ στρατηγοῦ POxy. 38.11

     (i A.D.), cf. UPZ71.15 (ii B.C.), Ev.Matt.28.14;

    γράψομαί σε ἐ. Ῥαδαμάνθυος Luc.Cat.18

    ;

    τινὰ εἰς δίκην καὶ κρίσιν ἐ. τῶν στρατοπέδων προκαλεῖν Jul.Or.1.30d

    ;

    πίστεις δοῦναι ἐ. θεῶν D.H.5.29

    ; but ἐπὶ δικασταῖς is f.l. in D.19.243 (leg. ἔπη).
    f with Verbs of perceiving, observing, judging, etc., in the case of,

    ἐπὶ νούσων παντοίων ἐπύθοντο Emp.112.10

    ;

    ὁρᾶν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.3.9.3

    ;

    αἰσθάνεσθαί τι ἐ. τινος Pl.R. 406c

    , etc.;

    τὴν γνώμην ἔχειν ἐ. τινος Hyp.Eux.32

    ;

    τὰ συμβόλαια ἐ. τῶν νόμων σκοπεῖν D.18.210

    ; ἐπ' αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων ἂν ἐσκόπει ib.233, cf. 25.2 (v.l.);

    ἐφ' ἑνός τι παριδεῖν Lycurg.64

    ;

    τὰς ἐναντιώσεις ἐ. μὲν τῶν λόγων τηροῦντες, ἐ. δὲ τῶν ἔργων μὴ καθορῶντες Isoc.13.7

    ;

    οὐδεὶς ἐφ' αὑτοῦ τὰ κακὰ συνορᾷ Men.631

    ;

    ἀγνοεῖν τι ἐ. τινος X.Mem.2.3.2

    ; also with Verbs of speaking, on a subject,

    λέγειν ἐ. τινος Pl.Chrm. 155d

    , R. 524e, etc.;

    ἐπιδεῖξαί τι ἐ. τινος Isoc.8.109

    ;

    ἵνα τοὺς ἐπαίνους ἐπ' αὐτῶν κοινοὺς ποιήσωμαι D.60.12

    .
    3 implying Motion:
    a where the sense of motion is lost in the sense of being supported, ὀρθωθεὶς.. ἐπ' ἀγκῶνος having raised himself upon his elbow, Il.10.80;

    ἐ. μελίης.. ἐρεισθείς 22.225

    ;

    τὴν μὲν.. καθεῖσεν ἐ. θρόνου 18.389

    .
    b in a pregnant sense, denoting the goal of motion (cf.

    εἰς A.1.2

    ,

    ἐν A.1.8

    ), νῆα.. ἐπ' ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, 1.485; περάαν νήσων ἔπι carry to the islands and leave there, 21.454, cf.22.45;

    ἐ. τῆς γῆς καταπίπτειν X.Cyr.4.5.54

    ; ἀναβῆναι ἐ. τῶν πύργων ib.7.1.39;

    ἐπ' Ἀβύδου ἀφικομέναις Th.8.79

     (v.l.); freq. of motion towards or (in a military sense) upon a place,

    προτρέποντο μελαινάων ἐ. νηῶν Il.5.700

    ;

    τρέσσε.. ἐφ' ὁμίλου 11.546

     (but νήσου ἔ. Ψυρίης νέεσθαι to go near Psyria, Od.3.171); ἐπ' οἴκου ἀπελαύνειν, ἀναχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρεῖν, homewards, Hdt.2.121.δ, Th.1.30,87, etc.; also with names of places,

    ἰέναι ἐ. Κυζίκου Hdt.4.14

    ;

    πλεῖν ἐ. Χίου Id.1.164

    , cf. 168; ἀποπλεῖν ἐπ' αἰγύπτου ib. 1;

    ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἐ. Θεσσαλίης Id.5.64

    ; ὁ κόλπος ὁ ἐ. Παγασέων φέρων the bay that leads to Pagasae, Id.7.193; ἡ ἐ. βαβυλῶνος ὁδός the road leading to B., X.Cyr. 5.3.45, cf.An.6.3.24.
    c metaph., ἐ. γνώμης τινὸς γίγνεσθαι come to an opinion, D.4.7;

    ἐπ' ἐλπίδος γενέσθαι Plu.Sol.14

    ; ὡς ἐ. κινδύνου as if to meet danger, Th.6.34;

    ἐ. τοῦ ἀλύπως ζῆν

     with a view to..,

    Pl.Prt. 358b

    ; cf. infr. B. 111.2.
    II of Time, in the time of,

    ἐ. προτέρων ἀνθρώπων Il.5.637

    ,23.332;

    ἐ. Κρόνου Hes.Op. 111

    ; ἐ. Κέκροπος, ἐ. Δαρείου, etc., Hdt.8.44,6.98, etc.;

    ἐ. τῶν τριάκοντα Lys.13.2

    ;

    ὀλιγαρχία ἡ ἐ. τῶν τετρακοσίων καταστᾶσα Isoc.8.108

    ; ἐ. τούτου τυραννεύοντος, ἐ. Λέοντος βασιλεύοντος, ἐ. Μήδων ἀρχόντων, etc., Hdt.1.15,65, 134, etc.;

    ἐ. τῆς ἐμῆς βασιλείας Isoc.3.32

    ; ἐπ' ἐμεῦ in my time, Hdt.1.5, 2.46, etc.;

    ἡ εἰρήνη ἡ ἐπ' Ἀνταλκίδου D.20.54

    , cf. X.HG5.1.36;

    αἱ ἐπ' Ἀσδρούβα γενόμεναι ὁμολογίαι Plb.3.15.5

    ; ἐπ' εἰρήνης in time of peace, Il.2.797, 9.403;

    ἐπ' ἐμῆς νεότητος Ar.Ach. 211

     (lyr.);

    ἐ. Λάχητος καὶ τοῦ προτέρου πολέμου Th.6.6

    ; ἐπ' ἡμέρης ἑκάστης v.l. for -ῃ -τῃ in Hdt.5.117.
    b later ἐ. δείπνου at dinner, Luc.Asin.3; ἐ. τῆς τραπέζης, ἐφ' ἑκάστης κύλικος, Plu.Alex.23; ἐ. τῆς κύλικος, ἐ. τοῦ ποτηρίου, Luc.Pisc.34, Plu.Alex.53.
    III in various causal senses:
    1 over, of persons in authority,

    ἐπ' οὗ ἐτάχθημεν Hdt.5.109

    ; οἱ ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων the public officers, D.18.247; freq. in forged decrees, ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὅπλων στρατηγός ib.38; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, τῶν ἱππέων, ib.116; ὁ ἐ. τῆς διοικήσεως ib.38 (but cf. c. 111.3); τοῦ ἐ. τῶν ὁπλιτῶν is f.l. in Lys. 32.5;

    ὁ ἐ. τῆς χώρας στρατηγός Plu.Phoc.32

    ;

    οἱ ἐ. τῶν σιτοποιῶν καὶ μαγείρων Id.Alex.23

    ;

    ὁ ἐ. τοῦ οἴνου Id.Pyrrh.5

    ; ὁ ἐ. τῶν ἐπιστολῶν τοῦ Ὄθωνος, = Lat. ab epistulis, his secretary, Id.Oth.9; cf. B. 111.6.
    2 κεκλῆσθαι ἐ. τινος to be called after him, Hdt.4.45;

    ἐ. τινος μετονομασθῆναι Id.1.94

    :

    ἐ. τινος τὰς ἐπωνυμίας ἔχειν Id.4.107

    ; ἐ. τινος ἐπώνυμος γίγνεσθαι ib. 184; also

    ἐπ' ὀνόματος καλεῖν Plb.5.35.2

    .
    3 of occasions, circumstances, and conditions, οὐκ ἐ. τούτου μόνον, ἀλλ' ἐ. πάντων, on all occasions, D.21.38, cf. 183;

    ἐφ' ἑκάστων Pl.Phlb. 25e

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑκατέρου Id.Tht. 159c

    ;

    ἐφ' ἑκάστης μαντείας D.21.54

    ; ἐπ' ἐξουσίας καὶ πλούτου πονηρὸν εἶναι in.. ib.138; ἐ. τῆς ἀληθείας καὶ τοῦ πράγματος ib.72, cf. 18.17;

    τὴν ἐ. τῆς πομπῆς καὶ τοῦ μεθύειν πρόφασιν λαβών Id.21.180

    ;

    ἐ. σχολῆς Aeschin.3.191

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀδείας Plu. Sol.22

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀληθείας Ev.Marc.12.14

    , POxy.255.16 (i A.D.): hence in adverbial phrases, ἐπ' ἴσας (sc. μοίρας) equally, S.El. 1062 (lyr.);

    ἐ. καιροῦ D.20.90

    ; ἐπ' ἐσχάτων at the last, LXXDe.17.7 (v.l. ἐσχάτῳ) ; ἐπὶ τοῦ παρόντος for the present, SIG543.6 (Epist. Philipp.).
    4 in respect of,

    ἐ. τῶν πραγμάτων Arist.Pol. 1280a17

    , cf. EN 1131b18; concerning,

    τὰ ἐπ' αὐτῶν ἐνεστηκότα PTeb.7.6

     (ii B. C.).
    B WITH DAT.:
    I of Place, upon, just like the gen. (hence Poets use whichever case suits the metre, whereas in Prose the dat. is more freq.):
    1 with Verbs of Rest,

    ἕζεο τῷδ' ἐ. δίφρῳ Il.6.354

    ;

    ἧντ' ἐ. πύργῳ 3.153

    ;

    στῆ δ' ἐ... νηΐ 8.222

    ;

    κεῖσθαι ἐ. τινι X.An.1.8.27

    ; καίειν ἐ. πᾶσι (sc. βωμοῖς) Il.8.240;

    ἔβραχε χαλκὸς ἐ. στήθεσσι 4.420

    ;

    ἐ. χθονὶ δέρκεσθαι 1.88

    , etc.: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something,

    νηυσὶν ἐπ' ὠκυπόροισιν ἔβαινον 2.351

     (v.l. for ἐν)

    ; ἐπ' ὤμοις φέρειν E.Ph. 1131

     (but ἐφ' ἵππῳ, ἐφ' ἵπποις and the like are never used for ἐφ' ἵππου, etc.); of places, mostly in,

    ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ Hdt.5.77

    ;

    τἀπὶ Τροίᾳ πέργαμα S.Ph. 353

    ;

    ἐπ' ἐσχάτοις τόποις Id.Tr. 1100

    ;

    ἐ. τῇ ψυχῇ δάκνομαι Id.Ant. 317

    ; also, at or near,

    ἐ. κρήνῃ Od.13.408

    ;

    ἐ. θύρῃσι Il.2.788

    , etc.; of rivers, etc., by, beside,

    ἐ. ὠκυρόῳ Κελάδοντι.. 7.133

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ἐσχάρῃ Od.7.160

    ;

    ἐ. νηυσί Il.1.559

    , etc.; of persons, οὐ τἀπὶ Λυδοῖς οὐδ' ἐπ' Ὀμφάλῃ λατρεύματα in Lydia, in the power of O., S.Tr. 356.
    b on or over, ἐπ' Ἰφιδάμαντι over the body of Iphidamas, Il.11.261, cf. 4.470;

    τοιόνδ' ἐπ' ἀνδρὶ κομπάζεις λόγον A.Ag. 1400

    ; also, over or in honour of,

    ἐ. σοὶ κατέθηκε.. ἄεθλα Od.24.91

    ; [

    βοῦς] ἐ. Πατρόκλῳ πέφνεν Il. 23.776

    ;

    κειράμενοι χαίτας ἐπ' Ἀδώνιδι Bion 1.81

    , cf. Lys.2.80; in [dialect] Dor. and [dialect] Aeol.sepulchral Inscrr., Schwyzer 348,al.
    c in hostile sense, against, Hdt.1.61,6.74, 88, S.Ph. 1139 (lyr.), etc.; as a check upon,

    οἱ πρόβουλοι καθεστᾶσιν ἐ. τοῖς βουλευταῖς Arist.Pol. 1299b37

    , cf. 1271a39; also, towards, in reference to,

    ἐ. πᾶσι χόλον τελέσαι Il.4.178

    ;

    ἐπ' ἔργοις πᾶσι S.OC 1268

    ;

    δικαιότερος καὶ ἐπ' ἄλλῳ ἔσσεαι Il.19.181

    , cf. S.Tr. 994 (anap.), etc.;

    ἐ. τοῖς δυνατοῖς ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην Democr. 191

    ; τὸ ἐ. πᾶσιν τοῖς σώμασι κάλλος extending over all bodies, Pl. Smp. 210b; ἡ [παιδεία] ἡ ἐ. σώμασι, ἐ. ψυχῇ, Id.R. 376e; τἀπὶ σοὶ κακά the ills which lie upon thee, S.Ph. 806: in [dialect] Att. also, νόμον τίθεσθαι, θεῖναι ἐ. τινι, make a law for his case, whether for or against, Pl.Grg. 488d, Lexap.And.1.87;

    νόμους ἀναγράψαι ἐ. τοῖς ἀδικοῦσι D.24.5

    ; νόμος κεῖται ἐ. τινι ib.70; τἀπὶ τῷ πλήθει νενομοθετημένα ib.123, cf. 142; τί θεσμοποιεῖς ἐ. ταλαιπώρῳ νεκρῷ; E.Ph. 1645.
    d. of accumulation, upon, after, ὄγχνη ἐπ' ὄγχνῃ one pear after another, pear on pear, Od.7.120;

    ἐ. κέρδεϊ κέρδος Hes.Op. 644

    ;

    ἄτη ἑτέρα ἐπ' ἄτῃ A. Ch. 404

     (lyr.); πήματα ἐ. πήμασι, ἐ. νόσῳ νόσος, S.Ant. 595, OC 544 (both lyr.).
    e. in addition to, over and above, besides, οὐκ ἄρα σοί γ'

    ἐ. εἴδεϊ καὶ φρένες ἦσαν Od.17.454

    , cf. 308;

    ἄλλα τε πόλλ' ἐ. τῇσι παρίσχομεν Il.9.639

    , cf. Od.22.264; ἐ. τοῖσι besides, 24.277;

    ἐ. τούτοις Him.Or.14.10

    ; so of Numerals,

    τρισχιλίους ἐ. μυρίοις Plu.Publ.20

    , cf. Jul.Or.4.148c, etc.;

    γυναῖκ' ἐφ' ἡμῖν.. ἔχει E.Med. 694

    : with Verbs of eating and drinking, with,

    ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ πίνειν ὕδωρ X.Cyr.6.2.27

    ; νέκταρ

    ποτίσαι ἐπ' ἀμβροσίᾳ Pl.Phdr. 247e

    ; esp. of a relish, κάρδαμον μόνον

    ἐ. τῷ σίτῳ ἔχειν X.Cyr.1.2.11

    ;

    παίειν ἐφ' ἁλὶ τὰν μᾶδδαν Ar.Ach. 835

    : metaph., ἐ. τῷ φάγοις ἥδιστ' ἄν; ἐ. βαλλαντίῳ; Id.Eq. 707; later ἐ. γογγυλίσι διαβιῶναι live on turnips, Ath.10.419a.
    f. of position, after, behind, of soldiers, X.Cyr.8.3.16-18.
    g. in dependence upon, in the power of,

    τὰ δ' οὐκ ἐπ' ἀνδράσι κεῖται Pi.P.8.76

    ; ἐ. τινί ἐστι it is in his power to do, c.inf., Hdt.8.29, etc.;

    ἐ. σοί ἐστιν ἀναζωπυρεῖν M.Ant.7.2

    ;

    ἐ. ἑτέροις γίγνεσθαι Th.6.22

    ; ἐ. τῷ πλήθει in their hands, S.OC66, cf. Th.2.84; τὸ ἐπ' ἐμοί, τὸ ἐ. ἐκείνῳ, etc., as far as is in my power, etc., X. Cyr.5.4.11, Isoc.4.142, etc.;

    τὸ ἐ. τούτοις εἶναι Lys.28.14

    ; ἐ. τοῖς υἱάσι their property, Leg.Gort.4.37.
    h. according to, ἐ. τοῖς νόμοις Lexap.D. 24.56;

    ἐ. πᾶσι δικαίοις ποιούμεθα τοὺς λόγους Id.20.88

    ;

    ἐ. προφάσει θηρός S.Tr. 662

     codd.(lyr.).
    i. of condition or circumstances in which one is,

    ἀτελευτήτῳ ἐ. ἔργῳ Il.4.175

    , etc.;

    ἐπ' ἀρρήτοις λόγοις S.Ant. 556

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀσφάκτοις μήλοισι E. Ion 228

     (lyr.);

    ταύταις ἐ. συντυχίαις Pi.P.1.36

    ;

    ἐπ' εὐπραξίᾳ S.OC 1554

    ;

    ἐ. τῷ παρόντι Th.2.36

    ; ἐπ' αὐτοφώρῳ λαβεῖν, v. αὐτόφωρος; also ἐ. τῷ δείπνῳ at dinner, X.Cyr.1.3.12, Thphr.Char. 3.2;

    ἐ. τῇ κύλικι Pl.Smp. 214b

    ;

    ἐ. θαλίαις E.Med. 192

     (anap.).
    k. Geom., of the point, etc., at which letters are written, κέντρον ἐφ' ᾧ K Hippocr. ap. Simp.in Ph.64.14; ἡ [γραμμὴ] ἐφ' ᾗ HK the line HK, Arist.Mete. 375b22.
    2. with Verbs of Motion:
    a. where the sense of motion merges in that of support,

    ἐ. χθονὶ βαίνει Il.4.443

    ;

    θεῖναι ἐ. γούνασιν 6.92

    ;

    καταθέσθαι ἐ. γαίῃ 3.114

    ; ἱστὸν ἔστησεν ἐ.

    ψαμάθοις 23.853

    ;

    ἐ. φρεσὶ θῆκε 1.55

    ; δυσφόρους ἐπ' ὄμμασι γνώμας

    βαλεῖν S.Aj.51

    , etc.
    b. in pregnant construction, πέτονται ἐπ' ἄνθεσιν fly on to the flowers and settle there, Il.2.89; ἐκ.. βαῖνον ἐ.

    ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης Od.15.499

    ;

    καθεῖσεν ἐ. Σκαμάνδρῳ Il.5.36

    ; ἦλθε δ'

    ἐ. Κρήτεσσι 4.251

    , cf. 273;

    νῆες εἰρύατ'.. ἐ. θινὶ θαλάσσης 4.248

    .
    c. rarely for εἰς c.acc.,

    νηυσὶν ἔ. γλαφυρῇσιν ἐλαυνέμεν 5.327

    , 11.274.
    d. in hostile sense, upon or against, ἐ. τινι ἔχειν, ἰθύνειν ἵππους, 5.240, 8.110; ἐ. τινι ἱέναι βέλος, ἰθύνεσθαι ὀϊστόν, 1.382, Od.22.8; ἐ. τοι

    Ἀκράγαντι τανύσαις Pi.O.2.91

    ;

    ἐ. Τυδεΐδῃ ἐτιταίνετο.. τόξα Il.5.97

    ;

    ἐφ' Ἕκτορι.. ἀκοντίσσαι 16.358

    ;

    κύνας.. σεύῃ ἐπ' ἀγροτέρῳ συΐ 11.293

    ;

    ὡρμήθησαν ἐπ' ἀνδράσιν Od.10.214

    , cf. E.Ph. 1379, etc.: also ἐ. τινι

    τετάχθαι Th.2.70

    , 3.13;

    ὅστις φάρμακα δηλητήρια ποιοῖ ἐ. Τηΐοισιν SIG37.2

     (Teos, v B.C.).
    II. of Time, rarely, and never in good [dialect] Att., exc. in sense of succession (infr. 2), ἐ. νυκτί by night, Il.8.529;

    ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ, αἱ δ' ἐ. νυκτί Hes.Op. 102

    ; ἐπ' ἤματι τῷδε on this very day, Il.13.234; ἐπ' ἤματι for to-day, 19.229, 10.48, Od.2.284; αἰεὶ ἐπ' ἤματι every day, 14.105;

    ἐπ' ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ Hdt.4.112

    , 5.53, cf. D.S. 34/5.2.1;

    ὁ ἥλιος νέος ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ ἐστίν Heraclit.6

    ;

    ἐ. τρίς Act.Ap.10.16

    , PHolm.1.18.
    2. of succession, after, ἕκτῃ ἐ. δέκα on the 16th of the month, Chron. ap. D.18.155, Decr.ib.181 ( δεκάτῃ codd.); τετράδι

    ἐ. δέκα IG12.304.62

    ; πρὸ τῆς ἕκτης ἐ. δέκα ib.22.1361.19; ἐπ' ἐξεργασμένοισι, = Lat. re peracta, Hdt.4.164, etc.; ἐ. τινι ἀγορεύειν, ἀνίστασθαι, E.Or. 898, 902, X.Cyr.2.3.7, etc.;

    ἐ. διεφθαρμένοισι Ἴωσι Hdt.1.170

    , τὰ ἐ. τούτοισι, = Lat. quod superest, Id.9.78, cf. Th.1.65, A.Ag. 255, etc.;

    τοὐπὶ τῷδε πῆμα E.Hipp. 855

     (lyr.), etc.
    3. in the time of (cf. A. 11) only in Arc.,

    ἐπὶ Χαιριάδαι Schwyzer665

     A 21, cf. 666 (Orchom.).
    III. in various causal senses:
    1. of the occasion or cause, τετεύξεται ἄλγε' ἐπ' αὐτῇ for her, Il.21.585; ἐ. σοὶ μάλα πόλλ' ἔπαθον for thee, 9.492: freq. with Verbs expressing some mental affection,

    ἐπὶ παντὶ λόγῳ ἐπτοῆσθαι Heraclit.87

    ; μέγα φρονεῖν ἐ. τινι to be proud at or of a thing, Pl.Prt. 342d, X.HG3.4.11, etc.; χλιδᾶν ἐ . τινι S.El. 360; ἀγάλλεσθαι, ἀγανακτεῖν ἐ. τοῖς παροῦσι, X.An.2.6.26, Isoc.4.122;

    ὀνομαστὸς ἐ. τινι γεγονέναι X.Mem.1.2.61

    ; also ἐφ' αἵματι φεύγειν to be tried on a capital charge, D.21.105; πληγὰς λαμβάνειν

    ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.1.3.16

    ;

    ζημιοῦσθαι ἐ. τινι D.24.122

    , etc.: in adverbial phrases [δικάσσαι] ἐπ' ἀρωγῇ with favour, Il.23.574;

    δολίῃ ἐ. τέχνῃ Hes. Th. 540

    ;

    ἐ. μιῇ αἰτίῃ ἀνήκεστον πάθος ἔρδειν Hdt.1.137

    , etc.; ἐ . κακουργίᾳ καὶ οὐκ ἀρετῇ for malice, Th.1.37; ἐπ' εὐνοία, ἐπ' ἔχθρα, D. 18.273, 21.55; ἐπ' ἀγαθῇ ἐλπίδι with.., X.Mem.2.1.18, cf. Ep.Rom. 4.18; ἐφ' ἑκατέροις in both cases, Pl.Tht. 158d, cf. Xenoph.34.4; ἐ.

    δάκρυσί τινα καταστένειν E. Tr. 315

     (lyr.); ἐ. τῇ πάσῃ συκοφαντίᾳ καὶ διασεισμῷ Mitteis Chr. 31 vI (ii B.C.), etc.
    2. of an end or purpose,

    υἱὸν ἐ. κτεάτεσσι λιπέσθαι Il.5.154

    , cf. 9.482; ἐ. δόρπῳ for supper, Od.18.44;

    ἐ. κακῷ ἀνθρώπου σίδηρος ἀνεύρηται Hdt.1.68

    ;

    ἐ. διαφθορῇ Id.4.164

    ;

    ἐ. σῷ καιρῷ S.Ph. 151

     (lyr.);

    ἐ. τῷ κέρδει X.Mem.1.2.56

    ; δῆσαι ἐ. θανάτῳ or τὴν ἐ. θανάτῳ, Hdt.9.37, 3.119, cf.1.109, X.An.1.6.10;

    ἐ. θανάτῳ συλλαβεῖν Isoc.4.154

    ; ἐπ' ἐξαγωγῇ for exportation, Hdt.5.6; χρηστηριάζεσθαι ἐ. τῇ χώρῃ with a view to gaining.., Id.1.66;

    ἐ. τούτοις ἐθύσαντο X.An.3.5.18

    ;

    ἐ. τῷ ὑβρίζεσθαι Th.1.38

    , cf.34, etc.;

    τι κακοτεχνεῖν ἐ. αἰσχύνῃ τοῦ ἀνδρός PEleph.1.6

     (iv B.C.).
    3. of the condition upon which a thing is done, ἐ. τούτοισι on these terms, Hdt.1.60, etc.;

    ἐ. τοῖσδε, ὥστε.. Th.3.114

    ; ἐ. τούτῳ, ἐπ' ᾧτε on condition that.., Hdt.3.83, cf. 7.158: in orat. obliq., ἐπ' or ἐφ' ᾧτε folld. by inf., Id.1.22, 7.154, X.HG2.2.20;

    ἐφ' ᾧ μηδὲν κακὸν ποιήσουσιν Th.1.126

     (but ἐφ' ᾧ = wherefore, Ep.Rom.5.12); ἐπ' οὐδενί on no condition, on no account, Hdt.3.38; but, for no adequate reason, D. 21.132; ἐπ' ἴσῃ τε καὶ ὁμοίῃ, ἐπὶ τῇ ἴσῃ καὶ ὁμοίᾳ, on fair and equal terms, Hdt.9.7, Th.1.27; ἐ. ῥητοῖς, v. ῥητός; also of a woman's dowry,

    τὴν μητέρα ἐγγυᾶν ἐ. ταῖς ὀγδοήκοντα μναῖς D.28.16

    ; γῆμαί

    τινα ἐ. δέκα ταλάντοις And.4.13

    ;

    τὴν θυγατέρα ἔχειν γυναῖκα ἐ. τῇ τυραννίδι Hdt.1.60

    ; on the principle of..,

    ἐ. τῷ μὴ λυπεῖν ἀλλήλους Th.1.71

    .
    4. of the price for which..,

    ἔργον τελέσαι δώρῳ ἔ. μεγάλῳ Il.10.304

    , cf. 21.445; ἐ. τίνι χρήματι; Hdt.3.38; ἐ. πόσῳ; Pl.Ap. 41a; ἐ .

    ταλάντῳ χρυσίου Ar.Av. 154

    ; ἐπ' ἀργυρίῳ λέγειν, πράττειν, D.19.182, 24.200;

    ἐ. χρήμασι λυμαίνεσθαι Id.19.332

    ;

    ἐ. πολλῷ ἐρρᾳθυμηκότες Id.1.15

    ; also of money lent at interest, δανείζεσθαι ἐ. τοῖς μεγάλοις τόκοις ibid.; ἐ. δραχμῇ δανείζειν lend at 12 per cent., Id.27.9; ἐπ' ὀκτὼ ὀβολοῖς τὴν μνᾶν τοῦ μηνὸς ἑκάστου δανείζειν, i.e. at 16 per cent., Id.53.13;

    ἐ. διακοσίαις εἴκοσι πέντε τὰς χιλίας

     for

    225

    per mille, i.e. 22.5 per cent., Syngr. ap. eund.35.10; also of the security on which money is borrowed,

    δανείζειν ἐ. ἀνδραπόδοις Id.27.27

    ; ἐπ' οἴνου

    κεραμίοις τρισχιλίοις Id.35.18

    ;

    ἐ. νηΐ Id.56.3

    ;

    δανείζειν ἐ. τοῖς σώμασιν Arist.Ath.9.1

    , cf. 2.2, D.H.4.9.
    5. of names, φάος καὶ νὺξ ὀνόμασται..

    ἐ. τοῖσί τε καὶ τοῖς Parm.9.2

    ;

    ἐ. τῇ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔχθρᾳ στάσις κέκληται Pl.R. 470b

    ; so

    ὄνομα κεῖται ἐ. τινι X.Cyr.2.2.12

    ; ὄνομα καλεῖν

    ἐ. τινι Pl.Sph. 218c

    , cf. 244b; πότερον ταῦτα, πέντε ὀνόματα ὄντα, ἐ.

    ἑνὶ πράγματί ἐστι Id.Prt. 349b

     (v. supr. A. 111.2).
    6. of persons in authority, ὅς μ' ἐ. βουσὶν εἷσεν who set me over the kine, Od.20.209, cf. 221;

    ποιμαίνειν ἐπ' ὄεσσι Il.6.25

    ;

    οὖρον κατέλειπον ἐ. κτεάτεσσιν Od.15.89

    ;

    σημαίνειν ἐ. δμῳῇσι 22.427

    ; πέμπειν ἐ. τοσούτῳ

    στρατεύματι Th.6.29

    ;

    ἐ. ταῖς ναυσίν X.HG1.5.11

    ;

    οἱ ἐ. ταῖς μηχαναῖς Id.Cyr.6.3.28

    ; οἱ ἐ. ταῖς καμήλοις ib.33;

    οἱ ἐ. τοῖς πράγμασιν ὄντες D. 9.2

    ;

    ἐ. θυγατρὶ.. γαμεῖν ἄλλην γυναῖκα Hdt.4.154

    .
    7. in possession of, possessing,

    ἐ. τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ μένειν Th.4.105

    , cf. 8.86; ζῆν ἐ. παιδίοις, τελευτᾶν ἐ. παιδὶ γνησίῳ, Alciphr.1.3, Philostr.VS2.12.2;

    ἐ. παισὶ διαδόχοις Hdn.4.2.1

    ;

    ἀποθανεῖν ἐ. κληρονόμοις ταῖς θυγατράσι Artem.1.78

    , cf. PMeyer6.22 (ii A.D.);

    ἐ. μόνῳ παιδὶ σαλεύειν Hld. 1.9

    .
    C. WITH Acc.:
    I. of Place, upon or on to a height, with Verbs of Motion,

    ἐ. πύργον ἔβη Il.6.386

    , cf. 12.375; ἐ. τὰ ὑψηλότατα τῶν

    ὀρέων ἀναβαίνειν Hdt.1.131

    ;

    προελθεῖν ἐ. βῆμα Th.2.34

    ; ἀναβιβαστέον τινά, ἀναβαίνειν ἐ. τὸν ἵππον, Pl.R. 467e, X.An.3.4.35; also ἐξ ἵππων

    ἀποβάντες ἐ. χθόνα Il.3.265

    ; ἐξεκυλίσθη πρηνὴς ἐ. στόμα upon his face, 6.43;

    ἐ. θρόνον.. ἕζετο 8.442

    ; ὤμω.. ἐ. στῆθος συνοχωκότε drawn together upon his breast, 2.218;

    Ὀδυσσῆ' εἷσαν ἐ. σκέπας Od.6.212

    ;

    θέσθαι ἐ. τὰ γόνατα X.An.7.3.23

    ;

    ἐπ' ἀμφότερα τὰ ὦτα καθεύδειν Aeschin.Socr.54

    ; ἐ. κεφαλήν head- foremost, Pl.R. 553b, Luc.Pisc.48 (v. κεφαλή): less freq. than ἐπί with gen. or dat.
    b. Geom., αἱ ἐ. τὰς ἁφὰς ἐπιζευγνύμεναι εὐθεῖαι joining the points of contact, Archim. Sph.Cyl.1.8; κάθετος ἐ. perpendicular to (v. κάθετος).
    2. to,

    ἦλθε θοὰς ἐ. νῆας Il.1.12

    , etc.; ἐ. βωμὸν ἄγων ib. 440; ἴθυσαν δ' ἐ.

    τεῖχος 12.443

    ;

    ἐ. τέρμ' ἀφίκετο S.Aj.48

    ;

    ἡ [ὁδὸς] ἐ. Σοῦσα φέρει X. An.3.5.15

    ;

    ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπὸ τῶν Πυλῶν ἐ. τὸ Ποσειδώνιον Th.4.118

    ; ἐ.

    τὸ αὐτὸ αἱ γνῶμαι ἔφερον Id.1.79

    : c.acc. pers.,

    βῆ δ' ἄρ' ἐπ' Ἀτρεΐδην Il.2.18

    , cf. 10.18,85, 150, etc.: sts. in pregn. constr. with Verbs of Rest,

    ἐπιστῆναι ἐ. τὰς θύρας Pl.Smp. 212d

    ;

    παρεῖναι ἐ. τὸν τάφον Th.2.34

    , cf. X.Cyr.3.3.12.
    b. metaph., ἐ. ἔργα τρέπεσθαι, ἰέναι, Il.3.422, Od.2.127;

    ἰέναι ἐ. τὸν ἔπαινον Th.2.36

    ;

    ἐ. συμφορὴν ἐμπεσεῖν Hdt.7.88

     codd.; also ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν ἀποδιδόναι, ὀφείλειν, pay, owe to the bank, D.33.12, Docum. ap. eund.45.31; ἡ ἐγγύη ἡ ἐ. τὴν

    τράπεζαν D.33.10

    ; τὸ ἐ. τὴν τράπεζαν χρέως ib.24; also εἰσποιηθῆναι ἐ. τὸ ὄνομά τινος to be entered under his name, Id.44.36.
    c. up to, as far as ( μέχρι ἐ. X.An.5.1.[1]),

    παρατείνειν ἐπ' Ἡρακλέας στήλας Hdt.4.181

    ;

    ἐ. θάλασσαν καθήκειν Th.2.27

    ,97: metaph., ἐ. πείρατ' ἀέθλων

    ἤλθομεν Od.23.248

    ; ἐ. διηκόσια ἀποδιδόναι yield 200- fold, Hdt. 1.193; in measurements,

    πλέον ἢ ἐ. δύο στάδια X.Cyr.7.5.8

    , An.6.2.2; ὅσον ἐ. εἴκοσι σταδίους ib.6.4.5, cf. 1.7.15: freq. with a neut. Adj. or Pron.,

    τόσσον τίς τ' ἐπιλεύσσει ὅσον τ' ἐ. λᾶαν ἵησιν Il.3.12

    ; ὅσσον

    ἔφ' 2.616

    , cf. 15.358; ἐ. τοσοῦτό γε φρονέω,.. ταύτην μηδὲν σίνεσθαι I am prudent enough, not to.., Hdt.6.97;

    ἐ. ὅσον δεῖ Th.7.66

    ; ἐ.

    πάντ' ἀφίξομαι S.OT 265

    ;

    ἐ. πᾶν ἐλθεῖν X.An.3.1.18

    ; ἐ. τὸ ἔσχατον

    ἀγῶνος ἐλθεῖν Th.4.92

    ; ἐ. μεῖζον χωρεῖν, ἔρχεσθαι, ib. 117, S.Ph. 259;

    ἐ. μέγα χωρεῖν δυνάμεως Th.1.118

    ; ἐ. μακρότερον, ἐ. μακρότατον, Id.4.41, 1.1, Hdt.4.16, 192; ἐ. σμικρόν, ἐ. βραχύ, a little way, a little, S. El. 414, Th.1.118; ἐπ' ἔλαττον, ἐπ' ἐλάχιστον, Pl.Phd. 93b, Th.1.70; ἐπ' ὀλίγον, ἐ. πολλά, Pl.Sph. 254b; ἐ. πλέον still more, Hdt.2.171, 5.51, Th.2.51; rarely with Advs.,

    ἐ. μᾶλλον Hdt.1.94

    , 4.181.
    d. before, into the presence of (cf. A. 1.2e),

    ἦγον δή μιν ἐ. τὰ κοινά Id.3.156

     (but στὰς ἐ. τὸ συνέδριον standing at the door of the council, Id.8.79);

    ἐ. ἡγεμόνας καὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχθήσεσθε Ev.Matt.10.18

    .
    e. in Military phrases (cf. A. 1.2d), ἐπ' ἀσπίδας πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν ἐτάξαντο, i.e. twenty-five in file, Th.4.93; dub. in X., as ἐ. πολλοὺς τεταγμένοι many in file, An.4.8.11 codd.;

    ἐπ' ὀλίγον τὸ βάθος γίγνεσθαι Cyr.7.5.2

     codd.; for ἐ. κέρας v. infr.3.
    3. of the quarter or direction towards or in which a thing takes place, ἐ. δεξιά, ἐπ' ἀριστερά, to the right or left, Il.7.238, 12.240, Od.3.171, Hdt.6.33, etc.; ἐ. τὰ ἕτερα or ἐ. θάτερα, Id.5.74, Th.1.87, etc.; ἐ. τὰ μακρότερα , βραχύτερα, on the longer, shorter side, Hdt.1.50; ἐπ' ἀμφότερα νοέων both ways, Id.8.22;

    ἐπ' ἀμφότερα μαχᾶν τάμνειν τέλος Pi.O.13.57

    , etc.; ἐ. τάδε Φασήλιδος on this side, Isoc.7.80; ἐ. ἐκεῖνα, v. ἐπέκεινα; ἐφ' ἕν, ἐ. δύο, ἐ. τρία, of space, in one, two, three dimensions, Arist.de An. 404b23, Plot.6.3.13; in Military phrases, ἐ. δόρυ ἀναστρέψαι ,ἐ. ἀσπίδα μεταβαλέσθαι, to the spear or shield side, i.e. to right or left, X.An.4.3.29, Cyr.7.5.6; ἐ. πόδα ἀναχωρεῖν, etc., retire on the foot, i.e. facing the enemy, Id.An.5.2.32; so ἐ. κέρας or ἐ. κέρως πλεῖν, etc., sail towards or on the wing, i.e. in column (v.

    κέρας v11

    ): metaph., ἐ. τὸ μεῖζον κοσμῆσαι, δεινῶσαι, etc., with exaggeration, Th.1.10, 8.74, etc.;

    ἐ. τὸ πλέον ἀγγέλλεσθαι Id.6.34

    ; ἐ. τὸ φοβερώτερον ib.83; ἐ. τὰ γελοιότερα ἐπαινέσαι so as to provoke laughter, Pl. Smp. 214e; ἐ. τὰ καλλίω, ἐ. τὰ αἰσχίονα, Id.Plt. 293e; ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον καὶ κάλλιον, ἐ. τὸ χεῖρον καὶ τὸ αἴσχιον, Id.R. 381b; ἐ. τὸ ἄμεινον Orac. ap. D.43.66.
    4. in hostile sense, against,

    ἰέναι ἐ. νέας Il. 13.101

    ;

    ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτούς 5.590

    ; στρατεύεσθαι or -εύειν ἐ. τινα, Hdt. 1.71,77, Th.1.26, etc.;

    ἰέναι ἐ. φάτιν S.OT 495

     (lyr.); πλεῖν ἐ. τοὺσ

    Ἀθηναίους Th.2.90

    ;

    πέμπειν στρατηγὸν ἐ. τινας Hdt.1.153

    ; θύεσθαι ἐ. τινα offer sacrifice on going against.., X.An.7.8.21; ἐφ' ὑμᾶς to your prejudice, D.6.33, 10.57.
    5. of extension over a space, πουλὺν ἐφ' ὑγρὴν ἤλυθον over much water, Il.10.27: ἐπ' εὐρέα νῶτα

    θαλάσσης 2.159

    ;

    ἐ. κύματα 13.27

    ;

    ὁρόων ἐπ' ἀπείρονα πόντον 1.350

    ; πλέων, λεύσσων ἐ. οἴνοπα πόντον, 7.88, 5.771;

    ἐ. πολλὰ δ' ἀλήθην Od. 14.120

    ;

    ἄγοισι.. Ἀνδρομάχαν.. ἐπ' ἄλμυρον πόντον Sapph.Supp. 20a

    . 7: also with Verbs of Rest, ἐπ' ἐννέα κεῖτο πέλεθρα over nine acres he lay stretched, Od.11.577; τόσσον ἔπ' over so much, 5.251, cf. 13.114; διώκοντες ἐ. πολύ over a large space, Th.1.50, cf. 62, etc.; ἐ. πλεῖστον ib.4;

    ὡς ἐ. πλεῖστον 2.34

    , etc.; freq. to be rendered on,

    δράκων ἐ. νῶτα δαφοινός Il.2.308

    ; ἵππους.. ἐ. νῶτον ἐΐσας ib. 765;

    ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει 17.447

    ; ἐ. γαῖαν εἰσὶ δύω [γένη] Hes.Op.11;

    ἀοιδοὶ ἔασιν ἐ. χθόνα Th.95

    ;

    ἐ. γᾶν μέλαιναν ἔμμεναι κάλλιστον Sapph. Supp.5.2

    ; also, among,

    κλέος πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους Il.10.213

    , cf. 24.202, 535;

    δασσάμενοι [κτήματ'] ἐφ' ἡμέας Od.16.385

    , cf. Pl.Prt. 322d.
    II. of Time, for or during a certain time,

    ἐ. χρόνον Il.2.299

    , Od.14.193:

    πολλὸν ἐ. χρόνον 12.407

    ;

    παυρίδιον.. ἐ. χρόνον Hes. Op. 133

    ;

    ἐ. δηρόν Il.9.415

    ;

    ἐ. πολὺν χρόνον Pl.Phd. 84c

    , etc.; ἐπ'

    ὀλίγον χρόνον Lycurg.7

    ; ἐ. χρόνον τινά, ἐ. τινα χρόνον, Pl.Prt. 344b, Grg. 524d;

    γῆν ἀπεμίσθωσαν ἐ. δέκα ἔτη Th.3.68

    ; ἐ. διετές Lexap.D. 46.20;

    ἐ. τρεῖς ἡμέρας X.An.6.6.36

    ; τὸ ἐφ' ἡμέραν ἀρκέσον enough for the day, Id.Cyr.6.2.34, cf. D.50.23, Hdt.1.32; ἐ. πολύ for a long time, Th.1.6, etc.
    2. up to, until a certain time, εὗδον παννύχιος

    καὶ ἐπ' ἠῶ καὶ μέσον ἦμαρ Od.7.288

    ;

    οὐδ' ἐ. γῆρας ἵκετ' 8.226

    .
    III. in various causal senses:
    1. of the object or purpose for which one goes, ἀγγελίην ἔπι Τυδῆ στεῖλαν sent him for (i.e. to bring) tidings of.., Il.4.384 (dub.); ἐ. βοῦν ἴτω let him go for an ox, Od.3.421;

    ἐ. τεύχεα δ' ἐσσεύοντο Il.2.808

    ;

    ἐλθεῖν πρός τινα ἐπ' ἀργύριον X.Cyr.1.6.12

    ; πέμπειν εἴς τινα ἐ. στράτευμα ib.4.5.31; ἴτω τις ἐφ' ὕδωρ ib.5.3.49; ἥκειν ἐ. τοὺς τόκους for (i.e. to demand) the interest, D.50.61: less freq. c. acc. pers.,

    ἐπ' Ὀδυσσῆα ἤϊε Od.5.149

    , cf. S.OT 555;

    κατῆλθον ἐ. ποιητήν Ar.Ra. 1418

    ;

    κατέρχονται ἐ. τὸν Ἀγόρατον Lys. 13.23

    : with acc. of a Noun of Action, ἐξιέναι ἐ. θήραν go out hunting, X.Cyr.1.2.9; ἔπλεον οὐχ ὡς ἐ. ναυμαχίαν (v.l. for -μαχίᾳ) Th.2.83;

    ἐ. μάχην ἰέναι X.An.1.4.12

    ; ἔρχεσθαι, ἵζειν ἐ. δεῖπνον, Il.2.381, Od.24.394;

    ἐ. δόρπον ἀνέστη 12.439

    ;

    κληθεὶς ἐ. δεῖπνον Pl.Smp. 174e

    , etc.;

    καλεῖν ἐ. ξείνια Hdt.2.107

    ,5.18; ἐ. τὴν θεωρίαν to see the sight, Ev.Luc.23.48, cf. PTeb.33.6 (ii B.C.): freq. with neut. Pron. or Adj., ἐ. τοῦτο ἐλθεῖν for this purpose, X.An.2.5.22, cf. Th.5.87; ἐπ' αὐτὸ

    τοῦτο Pl.Grg. 447b

    , etc.; ἐ. τί; to what end? Ar.Nu. 256;

    ἐφ' ὅ τι Id.Lys.22

    , 481; ἐφ' ἃ ἤλθομεν for which purpose, Th.7.15, etc.; ἐπὶ ἴσα for like ends, Pi.N.7.5 (but ἐ. ἶσα μάχη τέτατο, = ἴσως, Il.12.436); ἐ. τὸ βέλτιον to a better result, X.An.7.8.4; ἀναστῆσαί τινα ἐ. χριστὸν Θεοῦ set up as God's anointed, LXX 2 Ki.23.1: after an Adj., ἄριστοι πᾶσαν

    ἐπ' ἰθύν Il.6.79

    , cf. Od.4.434;

    ἄπορος ἐ. φρόνιμα S.OT 691

     (lyr.); χρήσιμος

    ἐ... οὐδέν D.25.31

    : after a Noun,

    ὁδὸς ἐ. τι X.Cyr.1.6.21

    ; ὄργανα ἐ. τι ib.6.2.34.
    2. so far as regards,

    τοὐπὶ τήνδε τὴν κόρην S.Ant. 889

    ;

    ὅσον γε τοὐπ' ἐμέ E.Or. 1345

    ; τοὐπί σε, τὸ ἐ. σέ, Id.Hec. 514, X.Cyr.1.4.12;

    τὸ ἐ. σφᾶς εἶναι Th.4.28

    ; ὡς ἐ. τὸ πολύ for the most part, Arist.Top. 100b29, etc.;

    ἐ. πᾶν Th.2.51

    ; τὸ πρὸς ἅπαν

    ξυνετὸν ἐ. πᾶν ἀργόν Id.3.82

    ;

    κρείσσων ἐπ' ἀρετήν Democr.181

    ; ἐ.

    μέγα Call.Dian.55

    .
    3. of persons set over others, ἐ. τοὺς πεζοὺς

    καθιστάναι ἄρχοντα X.Cyr.4.5.58

    , cf. HG3.4.20; στρατηγὸς ἐ. τοὺς ὁπλίτας, ἐ. τὴν χώραν, Arist.Ath.61.1, IG22.682.24;

    ἐ. τὸν Πειραιέα Arist.Ath.

    l.c.;

    ἐ. Ῥαμνοῦντα IG2.1206b

     (cf. A. 111.1); οἱ θεσμοθέται

    οἱ ἐ. τοὺς νόμους κληρούμενοι D.20.90

    .
    4. according to, by, ἐ. στάθμην by the rule, Od.5.245, 21.44, etc.
    D. POSITION:— ἐπί may suffer anastrophe ([etym.] ἔπι) and follow its case, as in Il.1.162; it may like wise follow its Verb,

    ἤλυθ' ἔπι ψυχή Od.24.20

    , cf. Il.9.539.
    II. in Poets it is sts. put with the second of two Nouns, though in sense it also governs the first, ἢ ἁλὸς ἢ ἐ.

    γῆς Od.12.27

    , cf. S.OT 761, Ant. 367 (lyr.).
    E. ABS., used adverbially, without anastrophe, καὶ ἐ. σκέπας

    ἦν ἀνέμοιο Od.5.443

    ; κτεῖνον δ' ἐ. μηλοβοτῆρας as well, Il.18.529; esp. ἐ. δέ.. and besides.., Hdt.7.65,75, etc.;

    πολιαί τ' ἐ. ματέρες S. OT 182

     (lyr.).
    II. ἔπι, for ἔπεστι, there is, Il.1.515, 3.45, Od.16.315; οὐ γὰρ ἔπ' ἀνήρ.. there is no man.., 2.58; σοὶ δ' ἔ. μὲν μορφὴ

    ἐπέων 11.367

    ;

    ἔ. δέ μοι γέρας A.Eu. 393

     codd. (lyr.).
    F. PROSODY: in ἐπιόψομαι, ι is not elided before a vowel; also in some words where σ or ϝ has been lost, as ἐπιάλμενος, ἐπιείκελος, ἐπιεικής, ἐπιέξομαι (v.

    ἐπέχω v11

    ). [dialect] Dor. ἐπιεργάζομαι (v. ἐπιεργάζομαι).
    G. IN COMPOSITION:
    I. of Place, denoting,
    1. Support or Rest upon, ἔπειμι (A), ἐπίκειμαι, ἐπικαθίζω, ἐπαυχένιος, ἐπιβώμιος, etc.
    2. Motion,
    a. upon or over, ἐπιβαίνω, ἐπιτρέχω.
    b. to or towards, ἐπέρχομαι, ἐπιστέλλω, ἐπαρίστερος, ἐπιδέξιος.
    c. against,

    ἐπαΐσσω, ἐπιπλέω 11

    , ἐπιστρατεύω, ἐπιβουλεύω.
    e. over a place, as in ἐπαιωρέομαι, ἐπαρτάω.
    f. over or beyond boundaries, as in ἐπινέμομαι.
    g. implying reciprocity, as in ἐπιγαμία.
    3. Extension over a surface, as in ἐπαλείφω, ἐπανθίζω,

    ἐπιπέτομαι, ἐπιπλέω 1

    , ἐπάργυρος, ἐπίχρυσος.
    4. Accumulation of one thing over or besides another, as in ἐπαγείρω, ἐπιμανθάνω, ἐπαυξάνω, ἐπιβάλλω, ἐπίκτητος.
    5. Accompaniment, to, with, as in ἐπᾴδω, ἐπαυλέω, ἐπαγρυπνέω: hence of Addition, ἐπίτριτος one and 1/3 more, 1 +1/3; so ἐπιτέταρτος, ἐπίπεμπτος, ἐπόγδοος, etc.
    6. with Adjs., somewhat, slightly, as in ἐπίξανθος, ἐπίπικρος.
    II. of Time and Sequence, after, as in ἐπιβιόω, ἐπιβλαστάνω, ἐπιγίγνομαι,

    ἐπακόλουθος, ἐπίγονος, ἐπιστάτης 1.2

    .
    III. in causal senses:
    1. Superiority felt over or at, as in ἐπιχαίρω, ἐπιγελάω, ἐπαισχύνομαι.
    2. Authority over, as in ἐπικρατέω, ἔπαρχος, ἐπιβουκόλος, ἐπιποιμήν.
    3. Motive for, as in ἐπιθυμέω, ἐπιζήμιος, ἐπιθάνατος.
    4. to give force or intensity to the Verb, as in ἐπαινέω, ἐπιμέμφομαι, ἐπικείρω, ἐπικλάω.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἐπί

  • 3 buscar

    v.
    1 to look.
    2 to look for.
    estoy buscando trabajo I'm looking for work
    se fue a buscar fortuna a América he went to seek his fortune in America
    María busca su bolso Mary looks for her purse.
    3 to look up.
    Busca esa palabra en el diccionario Look up that word in the dictionary.
    4 to search for (computing).
    El detective buscó incansablemente The detective searched tirelessly.
    5 to push, to try the patience of (informal) (provocar).
    buscar bronca/camorra to look for trouble
    6 to pick up.
    voy a buscar el periódico I'm going for the paper o to get the paper
    ir a buscar a alguien to pick somebody up
    pasará a buscarnos a las nueve she'll pick us up at nine
    7 to seek to, to attempt to, to try to, to try how to.
    Ese plan busca destruirnos That plan seeks to destroy us.
    * * *
    Conjugation model [ SACAR], like link=sacar sacar
    1 (gen) to look for, search for
    2 (en lista, índice etc) to look up
    3 (ir a coger) to go and get, fetch
    ■ busca un médico, ¡rápido! fetch a doctor, quick!
    4 (recoger) to pick up
    ■ iré a buscarte a la estación I'll pick you up at the station, I'll meet you at the station
    5 (intentar conseguir) to try to achieve
    1 (mirar) to look
    \
    buscársela familiar to be looking for trouble
    buscarse la vida familiar to try and earn one's living
    'Se busca...' "... wanted"
    * * *
    verb
    1) to look for, seek
    * * *
    1. VT
    1) (=tratar de encontrar)
    a) [+ persona, objeto perdido, trabajo] to look for

    llevo meses buscando trabajo — I've been job-hunting for months, I've been looking for a job for months

    el ejército busca a un comando enemigo — the army is searching for o looking for an enemy commando unit

    "se busca piso" — "flat wanted"

    "chico busca chica" — "boy seeks girl"

    b) [en diccionario, enciclopedia] to look up
    c) [con la vista] to try to spot, look for

    lo busqué entre el público pero no lo vi — I tried to spot him o looked for him in the crowd but I didn't see him

    2) (=tratar de conseguir) [+ solución] to try to find

    • buscar excusas — to make excuses

    • buscar hacer algo — to seek to do sth, try to do sth

    siempre buscaba hacerlo lo mejor posible — she always sought o tried to do the best possible thing

    • ir a buscar algo/a algn, ha ido a buscar una servilleta — she's gone to fetch o get a napkin

    ve a buscar a tu madre — go and fetch o get your mother

    vino buscando pelea — he was looking for trouble o a fight, he was spoiling for a fight *

    3) (=recoger) to pick up, fetch

    ¿vais a ir a buscarme a la estación? — are you going to pick me up o fetch me from the station?

    4) (Inform) to search
    5) (=preguntar por) to ask for

    ¿quién me busca? — who is asking for me?

    2.

    ya puedes dejar de buscar, aquí tienes las llaves — you can stop looking, here are the keys

    ¿has buscado bien? — have you looked properly?

    ¡busca! — [al perro] fetch!

    3.
    See:
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    a) <persona/objeto> to look for; <fama/fortuna> to seek; <trabajo/apartamento/solución> to look for, try to find

    la policía lo está buscando — the police are looking for him, he's wanted by the police

    b) (en libro, lista) to look up
    2)
    a) ( recoger) to collect, pick up
    b) ( conseguir y traer) to get

    fue a buscar un médico/un taxi — he went to get a doctor/a taxi

    3)

    ¿qué buscas con eso? — what are you trying to achieve by that?

    buscar + inf — to try to + inf, set out to + inf

    el libro busca destruir ese mito — the book sets out o tries o attempts to explode that myth

    b) ( provocar) <bronca/camorra> to look for
    2.
    buscar vi to look

    busca en el cajón — look o have a look in the drawer

    ¿has buscado bien? — have you looked properly?

    el que busca encuentra or busca y encontrarás — seek and ye shall find

    3.
    buscarse v pron
    1) ( intentar encontrar) to look for
    2) < problemas>

    no quiero buscarme complicaciones/problemas — I don't want any trouble

    tú te lo has buscado — you've brought it on yourself, it serves you right

    buscársela(s) — (fam)

    te la estás buscando — you're asking for trouble, you're asking for it (colloq)

    * * *
    = chase, dig out, dig up, find, hunt, investigate, locate, look for, look out, look under, look up, probe for, prowl through, search (for), seek (after), seek out, trace, track, trawl, burrow through, woo, root out, look out for, go for, look (a)round, fish (for), track down, jockey for, search out, line up, check for, forage, perform + search.
    Ex. Also, in controlled indexing language data bases, there is often an assumption that a user will be prepared to chase strings of references or to consult a sometimes complex thesaurus.
    Ex. I would also have dug out information references to which readers can be directed who want to know more about the setting.
    Ex. The list of changed headings is almost literally endless if you have the patience to dig them all up.
    Ex. The command function ' FIND' is used to input a search term.
    Ex. Nonetheless, we would still not wish to hunt through the file in order to change all subdivisions of that heading.
    Ex. Kaiser also investigated the effect of grouping subheadings of a subject.
    Ex. This order suffices for a list whose purpose is to identify and locate documents, whose bibliographic details are already known.
    Ex. A user might start by looking for a map of London, when he really wants a map of Camden.
    Ex. Discovering these tales, looking out printed versions and comparing them with the oral tradition would have introduced us step by step into the rich lode of folklore.
    Ex. In a printed catalogue or index a user is constrained to look under the headings in the catalogue.
    Ex. If so, the call number of the document is looked up and displayed.
    Ex. No one complained about Duff to her, and she decided not to probe for discontents.
    Ex. A user searching for Smith's 'History as Argument' who was not sure under which subject it would be entered, would have to prowl through a huge number of cards in a card catalog to find the entry under SMITH.
    Ex. This access is achieved by organising the tools so that a user may search under a specific access point or heading or index term, for example, subject term, author, name, title, date.
    Ex. A popular book will always be sought after by public librarians.
    Ex. Her article urges librarians not to buy inferior biographies simply to fill gaps in their collections but to seek out the best of the genre.
    Ex. The author approach remains an important means of tracing a specific document.
    Ex. The index fields are used for tracking annual indexes.
    Ex. The Internet search engines, such as AltaVista and Excite, send out robots or Web crawlers to trawl the Internet and automatically index the files that they find.
    Ex. This article explains how to use gophers to burrow through the Internet.
    Ex. Rumour had it that he was being wooed by Technicomm, Inc.
    Ex. The article has the title ' Rooting out journals on the Net'.
    Ex. Panellists presented the criteria they adopted and features they looked out for when selecting a library automation system.
    Ex. In an exclusive conversation Gates reveals where he goes for information knowledge, insights and ideas.
    Ex. One has only to look around in bookshops to see how many paperbacks on show have film or TV links.
    Ex. The article 'Catfish ain't ugly' reviews the range of Web sites providing information about the catfish in the USA and places to go to fish for catfish.
    Ex. In stepping away from the genre's glamorous robberies and flashy lifestyle, this stealthy, potent movie tracks down the British gangster icon to its inevitable end.
    Ex. Librarians are not yet very successful in jockeying for position and power in the political world.
    Ex. On any one occasion there will always be children who do not want to borrow or buy, but they are still learning to live with books and how to search out the ones that interest them.
    Ex. The actress flaked out again and the director is trying to line up a replacement.
    Ex. This was important before computers were invented, when calculations were all done by hand, and also were done repeatedly to check for calculation errors.
    Ex. We both woke up bright and early to forage for food nearby, which was a breeze.
    Ex. When viewing a record, you can also display its references and perform citation searches directly from the reference display.
    ----
    * buscando = in search of.
    * buscando como loco = in hot pursuit of.
    * buscar amparo = seek + shelter.
    * buscar apoyo = line up + support.
    * buscar a tientas = grope (for/toward).
    * buscar a través de los índices = browse.
    * buscar ayuda = seek + assistance, seek + help.
    * buscar cobijo = seek + shelter.
    * buscar con ahínco = look + hard.
    * buscar detenidamente = look + hard.
    * buscar el apoyo de = woo.
    * buscar el camino = wind + Posesivo + way.
    * buscar el modo de = explore + ways in which, explore + ways and means of.
    * buscar el origen de = trace + the origin of.
    * buscar el origen de la relación entre = trace + the relationship between.
    * buscar el peligro = court + danger, flirt with + danger.
    * buscar empleo = seek + employment.
    * buscar en = sift through, search through.
    * buscar en Google = google.
    * buscar en las posas entre las rocas de la orilla = rock-pool.
    * buscar en otro sitio = go + elsewhere.
    * buscar entre la basura = scavenge.
    * buscar en varios + Nombre + a la vez = search across + Nombre.
    * buscar información = mine + information, seek + information.
    * buscar interiormente = probe + Reflexivo + for.
    * buscar la controversia = court + controversy.
    * buscar la fama = grab at + a headline.
    * buscar la forma de = look for + ways to.
    * buscar la forma de + Infinitivo = develop + way of + Gerundio.
    * buscar la identidad de uno = trace + Posesivo + identity.
    * buscar la manera de = explore + ways in which, explore + ways and means of.
    * buscar la noticia = grab at + a headline.
    * buscar la oportunidad = make + an opportunity.
    * buscar la protección de = burrow back into.
    * buscarle cinco pies al gato = split + hairs.
    * buscarle los tres pies al gato = nitpick.
    * buscarle tres pies al gato = split + hairs.
    * buscar los servicios de = engage.
    * buscar material = pursue + material.
    * buscar oro = pan for + gold.
    * buscar placer = seek + pleasure.
    * buscar por autor y título = search by + name-title key.
    * buscar por título = search by + title key.
    * buscar por todas partes = scour + Nombre + for.
    * buscar por todo el mundo = search + the world (over).
    * buscar por todo + Nombre = search across + Nombre.
    * buscar problemas = ask for + trouble, court + disaster, make + trouble.
    * buscar razones que expliquen Algo = ascribe + reasons to.
    * buscar refugio = seek + shelter.
    * buscar satisfacción = seek + satisfaction.
    * buscárselo = have it + coming.
    * buscar simultáneamente en varios sitios = cross-search [cross search].
    * buscar solución = seek + solution.
    * buscar trabajo = seek + employment.
    * buscar trabajo en la calle = work + the streets.
    * buscar una forma de hacer Algo = develop + way + to make + Nombre, develop + way + to make + Nombre.
    * buscar una oportunidad = look for + an opportunity.
    * buscar una respuesta = pursue + answer.
    * buscar una solución = contrive + solution.
    * buscar y encontrar = match.
    * en busca de quimeras = in pursuit of + windmills.
    * encargado de buscar a los alumnos que hacen novillos = truant officer.
    * en el que se puede buscar = searchable.
    * estar siempre buscando = be on the lookout for.
    * hallar lo buscado = achieve + match.
    * mandar a buscar = send for.
    * no buscarle las pulgas al perro = let + sleeping dogs lie.
    * no poderse buscar = be unsearchable.
    * peinar en busca de = scour + Nombre + for.
    * que busca el beneficio propio = self-serving.
    * que se puede buscar = searchable.
    * respuesta + buscar = answer + lie.
    * saber buscar con inteligencia = be search-savvy.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    a) <persona/objeto> to look for; <fama/fortuna> to seek; <trabajo/apartamento/solución> to look for, try to find

    la policía lo está buscando — the police are looking for him, he's wanted by the police

    b) (en libro, lista) to look up
    2)
    a) ( recoger) to collect, pick up
    b) ( conseguir y traer) to get

    fue a buscar un médico/un taxi — he went to get a doctor/a taxi

    3)

    ¿qué buscas con eso? — what are you trying to achieve by that?

    buscar + inf — to try to + inf, set out to + inf

    el libro busca destruir ese mito — the book sets out o tries o attempts to explode that myth

    b) ( provocar) <bronca/camorra> to look for
    2.
    buscar vi to look

    busca en el cajón — look o have a look in the drawer

    ¿has buscado bien? — have you looked properly?

    el que busca encuentra or busca y encontrarás — seek and ye shall find

    3.
    buscarse v pron
    1) ( intentar encontrar) to look for
    2) < problemas>

    no quiero buscarme complicaciones/problemas — I don't want any trouble

    tú te lo has buscado — you've brought it on yourself, it serves you right

    buscársela(s) — (fam)

    te la estás buscando — you're asking for trouble, you're asking for it (colloq)

    * * *
    = chase, dig out, dig up, find, hunt, investigate, locate, look for, look out, look under, look up, probe for, prowl through, search (for), seek (after), seek out, trace, track, trawl, burrow through, woo, root out, look out for, go for, look (a)round, fish (for), track down, jockey for, search out, line up, check for, forage, perform + search.

    Ex: Also, in controlled indexing language data bases, there is often an assumption that a user will be prepared to chase strings of references or to consult a sometimes complex thesaurus.

    Ex: I would also have dug out information references to which readers can be directed who want to know more about the setting.
    Ex: The list of changed headings is almost literally endless if you have the patience to dig them all up.
    Ex: The command function ' FIND' is used to input a search term.
    Ex: Nonetheless, we would still not wish to hunt through the file in order to change all subdivisions of that heading.
    Ex: Kaiser also investigated the effect of grouping subheadings of a subject.
    Ex: This order suffices for a list whose purpose is to identify and locate documents, whose bibliographic details are already known.
    Ex: A user might start by looking for a map of London, when he really wants a map of Camden.
    Ex: Discovering these tales, looking out printed versions and comparing them with the oral tradition would have introduced us step by step into the rich lode of folklore.
    Ex: In a printed catalogue or index a user is constrained to look under the headings in the catalogue.
    Ex: If so, the call number of the document is looked up and displayed.
    Ex: No one complained about Duff to her, and she decided not to probe for discontents.
    Ex: A user searching for Smith's 'History as Argument' who was not sure under which subject it would be entered, would have to prowl through a huge number of cards in a card catalog to find the entry under SMITH.
    Ex: This access is achieved by organising the tools so that a user may search under a specific access point or heading or index term, for example, subject term, author, name, title, date.
    Ex: A popular book will always be sought after by public librarians.
    Ex: Her article urges librarians not to buy inferior biographies simply to fill gaps in their collections but to seek out the best of the genre.
    Ex: The author approach remains an important means of tracing a specific document.
    Ex: The index fields are used for tracking annual indexes.
    Ex: The Internet search engines, such as AltaVista and Excite, send out robots or Web crawlers to trawl the Internet and automatically index the files that they find.
    Ex: This article explains how to use gophers to burrow through the Internet.
    Ex: Rumour had it that he was being wooed by Technicomm, Inc.
    Ex: The article has the title ' Rooting out journals on the Net'.
    Ex: Panellists presented the criteria they adopted and features they looked out for when selecting a library automation system.
    Ex: In an exclusive conversation Gates reveals where he goes for information knowledge, insights and ideas.
    Ex: One has only to look around in bookshops to see how many paperbacks on show have film or TV links.
    Ex: The article 'Catfish ain't ugly' reviews the range of Web sites providing information about the catfish in the USA and places to go to fish for catfish.
    Ex: In stepping away from the genre's glamorous robberies and flashy lifestyle, this stealthy, potent movie tracks down the British gangster icon to its inevitable end.
    Ex: Librarians are not yet very successful in jockeying for position and power in the political world.
    Ex: On any one occasion there will always be children who do not want to borrow or buy, but they are still learning to live with books and how to search out the ones that interest them.
    Ex: The actress flaked out again and the director is trying to line up a replacement.
    Ex: This was important before computers were invented, when calculations were all done by hand, and also were done repeatedly to check for calculation errors.
    Ex: We both woke up bright and early to forage for food nearby, which was a breeze.
    Ex: When viewing a record, you can also display its references and perform citation searches directly from the reference display.
    * buscando = in search of.
    * buscando como loco = in hot pursuit of.
    * buscar amparo = seek + shelter.
    * buscar apoyo = line up + support.
    * buscar a tientas = grope (for/toward).
    * buscar a través de los índices = browse.
    * buscar ayuda = seek + assistance, seek + help.
    * buscar cobijo = seek + shelter.
    * buscar con ahínco = look + hard.
    * buscar detenidamente = look + hard.
    * buscar el apoyo de = woo.
    * buscar el camino = wind + Posesivo + way.
    * buscar el modo de = explore + ways in which, explore + ways and means of.
    * buscar el origen de = trace + the origin of.
    * buscar el origen de la relación entre = trace + the relationship between.
    * buscar el peligro = court + danger, flirt with + danger.
    * buscar empleo = seek + employment.
    * buscar en = sift through, search through.
    * buscar en Google = google.
    * buscar en las posas entre las rocas de la orilla = rock-pool.
    * buscar en otro sitio = go + elsewhere.
    * buscar entre la basura = scavenge.
    * buscar en varios + Nombre + a la vez = search across + Nombre.
    * buscar información = mine + information, seek + information.
    * buscar interiormente = probe + Reflexivo + for.
    * buscar la controversia = court + controversy.
    * buscar la fama = grab at + a headline.
    * buscar la forma de = look for + ways to.
    * buscar la forma de + Infinitivo = develop + way of + Gerundio.
    * buscar la identidad de uno = trace + Posesivo + identity.
    * buscar la manera de = explore + ways in which, explore + ways and means of.
    * buscar la noticia = grab at + a headline.
    * buscar la oportunidad = make + an opportunity.
    * buscar la protección de = burrow back into.
    * buscarle cinco pies al gato = split + hairs.
    * buscarle los tres pies al gato = nitpick.
    * buscarle tres pies al gato = split + hairs.
    * buscar los servicios de = engage.
    * buscar material = pursue + material.
    * buscar oro = pan for + gold.
    * buscar placer = seek + pleasure.
    * buscar por autor y título = search by + name-title key.
    * buscar por título = search by + title key.
    * buscar por todas partes = scour + Nombre + for.
    * buscar por todo el mundo = search + the world (over).
    * buscar por todo + Nombre = search across + Nombre.
    * buscar problemas = ask for + trouble, court + disaster, make + trouble.
    * buscar razones que expliquen Algo = ascribe + reasons to.
    * buscar refugio = seek + shelter.
    * buscar satisfacción = seek + satisfaction.
    * buscárselo = have it + coming.
    * buscar simultáneamente en varios sitios = cross-search [cross search].
    * buscar solución = seek + solution.
    * buscar trabajo = seek + employment.
    * buscar trabajo en la calle = work + the streets.
    * buscar una forma de hacer Algo = develop + way + to make + Nombre, develop + way + to make + Nombre.
    * buscar una oportunidad = look for + an opportunity.
    * buscar una respuesta = pursue + answer.
    * buscar una solución = contrive + solution.
    * buscar y encontrar = match.
    * en busca de quimeras = in pursuit of + windmills.
    * encargado de buscar a los alumnos que hacen novillos = truant officer.
    * en el que se puede buscar = searchable.
    * estar siempre buscando = be on the lookout for.
    * hallar lo buscado = achieve + match.
    * mandar a buscar = send for.
    * no buscarle las pulgas al perro = let + sleeping dogs lie.
    * no poderse buscar = be unsearchable.
    * peinar en busca de = scour + Nombre + for.
    * que busca el beneficio propio = self-serving.
    * que se puede buscar = searchable.
    * respuesta + buscar = answer + lie.
    * saber buscar con inteligencia = be search-savvy.

    * * *
    buscar [A2 ]
    vt
    1 ‹persona/objeto› to look for; ‹fama/fortuna› to seek; ‹trabajo/apartamento› to look for, try to find; ‹solución› to look for, try to find
    lo he buscado en or por todas partes I've looked o searched for it everywhere
    no trates de buscar excusas don't try to make excuses
    la policía lo está buscando the police are looking for him, he's wanted by the police
    [ S ] se busca wanted
    los hombres como él sólo buscan una cosa men like him are only after one thing ( colloq)
    te buscan en la portería someone is asking for you at reception
    las flores buscan la luz flowers grow towards the light
    la buscaba con la mirada or los ojos he was trying to spot her
    está buscando la oportunidad de vengarse he's looking for a chance to get his own back ( colloq)
    busca una manera más fácil de hacerlo try and find an easier way of doing it
    2 (en un libro, una lista) to look up
    busca el número en la guía look up the number in the directory
    B
    1 (recoger) to collect, pick up
    fuimos a buscarlo al aeropuerto we went to pick him up from o fetch him from o collect him from o meet him at the airport
    vengo a buscar mis cosas I've come to collect o pick up my things
    fue a buscar un médico he went to get a doctor, he fetched a doctor
    salió a buscar un taxi/el pan he went to get a taxi/the bread
    sube a buscarme las tijeras go up and get me o bring me o fetch me the scissors
    C
    1
    (intentar conseguir): una ley que busca la igualdad de (los) sexos a law which aims to achieve sexual equality o equality between the sexes
    ¿qué buscas con eso? what are you trying to achieve by that?
    tiene cuatro hijas y busca el varón ( fam); she has four girls and she's trying for a boy
    buscar + INF to try to + INF, set out to + INF
    el libro busca destruir ese mito the book sets out o tries o attempts to explode that myth
    2 (provocar) ‹bronca/camorra› to look for
    siempre están buscando pelea they're always looking o spoiling for a fight
    me está buscando y me va a encontrar he's looking for trouble and he's going to get it
    ■ buscar
    vi
    to look
    busca en el cajón look o have a look in the drawer
    ¿has buscado bien? have you looked properly?, have you had a proper look?
    ¡busca! ¡busca! (a un perro) fetch!
    A (intentar encontrar) to look for
    debería buscarse a alguien que le cuidara los niños she should look for o find somebody to look after the children
    B ‹complicaciones/problemas›
    no quiero buscarme complicaciones I don't want any trouble
    tú te lo has buscado you've brought it on yourself, it serves you right
    se está buscando problemas she's asking for trouble
    buscársela(s) ( fam): te la estás buscando you're asking for trouble, you're asking for it ( colloq)
    no te quejes, la verdad es que te la buscaste don't complain, the truth is you had it coming to you o you brought it on yourself ( colloq)
    * * *

     

    Multiple Entries:
    buscar    
    buscar algo
    buscar ( conjugate buscar) verbo transitivo
    1

    ‹fama/fortuna› to seek;

    b) (en libro, lista) to look up;


    2



    (— en tren, a pie) I went to meet him at the airport;
    ◊ vengo a buscar mis cosas I've come to collect o pick up my things



    fue a buscar un médico/un taxi he went to get a doctor/a taxi;
    ¿qué buscas con eso? what are you trying to achieve by that?
    verbo intransitivo
    to look;
    ◊ busca en el cajón look o have a look in the drawer

    buscarse verbo pronominal
    1 ( intentar encontrar) to look for
    2 ‹ problemas› to ask for;
    ◊ no quiero buscarme complicaciones/problemas I don't want any trouble;

    tú te lo has buscado you've brought it on yourself, it serves you right;
    buscársela(s) (fam): te la estás buscando you're asking for trouble, you're asking for it (colloq)
    buscar verbo transitivo
    1 to look for
    2 (en la enciclopedia, en el diccionario) to look up
    3 (conseguir, traer) to fetch: ve a buscar un poco de agua, go and fetch some water
    4 (recoger cosas) to collect
    (recoger personas) to pick up: fue a buscarme al trabajo, she picked me up from work
    ' buscar' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    acudir
    - condicionamiento
    - ir
    - mirar
    - sistema
    - tienta
    - aguja
    - andar
    - bronca
    - camorra
    - colocación
    - pelea
    - perro
    - recoger
    - refugio
    - trabajo
    - venir
    English:
    advertise
    - collect
    - dig around
    - down-market
    - expressly
    - fetch
    - fish
    - forage
    - fumble
    - get
    - go for
    - hunt
    - instrumental
    - kerb-crawl
    - look
    - look for
    - look out for
    - look up
    - meet
    - needle
    - pick
    - pick up
    - prospect
    - pursue
    - scout around
    - search
    - search for
    - seek
    - seek after
    - spoil for
    - want
    - afield
    - call
    - collection
    - court
    - dig
    - feel
    - ferry
    - go
    - grope
    - house
    - job
    - nook
    - scout
    - send
    - trouble
    - woo
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    1. [para encontrar] to look for, to search for;
    [provecho, beneficio propio, fortuna] to seek;
    busco apartamento en esta zona I am looking for Br a flat o US an apartment in this area;
    estoy buscando trabajo I'm looking for work;
    la policía busca a los terroristas the police are searching o hunting for the terrorists;
    lo busqué, pero no lo encontré I looked o hunted for it, but I couldn't find it;
    ¿me ayudas a buscar las llaves? can you help me to look for the keys?;
    se fue a buscar fortuna a América he went to seek his fortune in America;
    fui a buscar ayuda I went in search of help;
    ¡ve a buscar ayuda, rápido! quick, go for help o go and find help!;
    es como buscar una aguja en un pajar it's like looking for a needle in a haystack;
    CSur Fam
    buscar la vuelta a algo to (try to) find a way of doing sth
    2. [recoger] to pick up;
    vino a buscar sus libros he came to pick up his books;
    voy a buscar el periódico I'm going for the paper o to get the paper;
    ir a buscar a alguien to pick sb up;
    ya iré yo a buscar a los niños al colegio I'll go and pick the children up from school;
    pasará a buscarnos a las nueve she'll pick us up at nine
    3. [en diccionario, índice, horario] to look up;
    buscaré la dirección en mi agenda I'll look up the address in my address book
    4. [intentar conseguir]
    siempre busca quedar bien con todos she always tries to please everybody;
    no sé qué está buscando con esa actitud I don't know what he is hoping to achieve with that attitude;
    con estas medidas buscan reducir la inflación these measures are intended to reduce inflation, with these measures they are seeking to reduce inflation;
    Fam
    ése sólo busca ligar he's only after one thing
    5. Informát to search for
    6. Fam [provocar] to push, to try the patience of;
    no me busques, que me voy a enfadar don't push me o it, I'm about to lose my temper;
    buscar bronca o [m5] camorra to look for trouble
    ♦ vi
    to look;
    busqué bien pero no encontré nada I had a thorough search, but didn't find anything;
    buscamos por toda la casa we looked o searched throughout the house, we searched the house from top to bottom
    * * *
    v/t search for, look for;
    ir/venir a buscar fetch;
    se la estaba buscando he was asking for trouble o for it
    * * *
    buscar {72} vt
    1) : to look for, to seek
    2) : to pick up, to collect
    3) : to provoke
    buscar vi
    : to look, to search
    buscó en los bolsillos: he searched through his pockets
    * * *
    buscar vb
    1. (tratar de encontrar) to look for
    2. (consultar) to look up
    3. (recoger) to pick up / to meet [pt. & pp. met]
    4. (traer) to fetch / to get
    "Se busca" "Wanted"

    Spanish-English dictionary > buscar

  • 4 त्रि _tri

    त्रि num. a. [Uṇ.5.66] (declined in pl. only, nom. त्रयः m., तिस्त्रः f., त्रीणि n.) Three; त एव हि त्रयो लोकास्त एव त्रय आश्रमाः &c. Ms.2.229; प्रियतमाभिरसौ तिसृभिर्बभौ R.9.18; त्रीणि वर्षाण्युदीक्षेत कुमार्यृतुमती सती Ms.9.9 [cf. L. tres; Gr. treis; A. S., Zend thri; Eng. three].
    -Comp. -अंशः 1 a three-fold share; त्र्यंशं दायाद्धरेद्विप्रः Ms.9.151.
    -2 a third part.
    -3 three-fourths.
    -अक्ष a. triocular.
    -अक्षः, -अक्षकः an epithet of Śiva; शुष्कस्नायु- स्वराह्लादात्त्र्यक्षं जग्राह रावणः Pt.5.57.
    -अक्षरः 1 the mystic syllable ओम् consisting of three letters; see under अ. आद्यं यत्त्र्यक्षरं ब्रह्म Ms.11.265.
    -2 a match- maker or घटक (that word consisting of three syllables).
    -3 a genealogist. (
    -री) knowledge, learning; see विद्या.
    -अङ्कटम्, -अङ्गटम् 1 three strings suspended to either end of a pole for carrying burdens.
    -2 a sort of colly- rium. (
    -टः) N. of Śiva.
    -अङ्गम् (pl.) a tripartite army (chariots, cavalry and infantry).
    -अङ्गुलम् three fingers' breadth.
    -अञ्जनम् the three kinds of collyrium; i. e. कालाञ्जन, रसाञ्जन and पुष्पाञ्जन.
    -अञ्जलम्, -लिः three handfuls taken collectively.
    -अधिपतिः (the lord of the 3 guṇas or worlds), an epithet of Viṣṇu; Bhāg.3.16.24.
    -अधिष्ठानः the soul. (
    नम्) spirit, life (चैतन्य). -a. having three stations; Ms.12.4.
    -अध्वगा, -मार्गगा, -वर्त्मगा epithets of the river Ganges (flowing through the three worlds).
    -अनीक a. having the three properties of heat, rain and cold; त्यनीकः पत्यते माहिनावान् Rv.3.56.3. (
    -का) an army consisting of horses, elephants and chariots.
    -अब्द a. three years old.
    -ब्दम् three years taken collectively.
    -अम्बकः (also त्रियम्बक in the same sense though rarely used in classical literature) 'having three eyes', N. of Śiva.; त्रियम्बकं संयमिनं ददर्श Ku.3.44; जडीकृतस्त्र्यम्बकवीक्षणेन R.2. 42;3.49. ˚सखः an epithet of Kubera; कुबेरस्त्र्यम्बकसखः Ak.
    -अम्बका an epithet of Pārvatī
    -अशीत a. eighty-third.
    -अशीतिः f. eighty-three.
    -अष्टन् a. twenty-four.
    -अश्र, -अस्र a. triangular. (
    -स्रम्) a triangle.
    -अहः 1 a period of three days.
    -2 a festival lasting three days.
    -आर्षेयाः deaf, dumb and blind persons.
    -आहिक a.
    1 performed or produced in three days.
    -2 recurring after the third day, tertian (as fever).
    -3 having provision for three days कुशूलकुम्भीधान्यो वा त्र्याहिको$श्वस्तनो$पि वा Y.1.128.
    -ऋचम् (
    तृचम् also) three Riks taken collectively; Ms.8.16.
    -ऐहिक a. having provision for three days.
    -ककुद् m.
    1 N. of the moun- tain Trikūṭa.
    -2 N. of Viṣnu or Kṛiṣṇa.
    -3 the highest, chief.
    -4 a sacrifice lasting for ten nights.
    -ककुभ् m. Ved.
    1 Indra.
    -2 Indra's thunderbolt.
    -कटु dry ginger, black pepper and long pepper taken together as a drug; शिरामोक्षं विधायास्य दद्यात् त्रिकटुकं गुडम् Śālihotra 62.
    -कण्टः, -कण्टकः a kind of fish.
    -करणी the side of a square 3 times as great as another.
    -कर्मन् n. the chief three duties of a Brāhmaṇa i. e. sacrifice, study of the Vedas, and making gifts or charity. (-m.) one who engages in these three duties (as a Brāhmaṇa).
    -काण्डम् N. of Amarsiṁha's dictionary.
    -कायः N. of Buddha.
    -कालम् 1 the three times; the past, the pre- sent, and the future; or morning, noon and evening.
    -2 the three tenses (the past, present, and future) of a verb. (
    -लम् ind. three times, thrice; ˚ज्ञ, ˚दर्शिन् a. omniscient (m.)
    1 a divine sage, seer.
    -2 a deity.
    -3 N. of Buddha. ˚विद् m.
    1 a Buddha.
    -2 an Arhat (with the Jainas).
    -कूटः N. of a mountain in Ceylon on the top of which was situated Laṅkā, the capital of Rāvaṇa.; Śi.2.5.
    -कूटम् sea-salt.
    कूर्चकम् a knife with three edges.
    -कोण a. triangular, forming a triangle.
    (-णः) 1 a triangle.
    -2 the vulva.
    -खम् 1 tin.
    -2 a cucumber.
    -खट्वम्, -खट्वी three bed- steads taken collectively.
    -क्षाराणि n. (pl.) salt-petre, natron and borax.
    -गणः an aggregate of the three objects of worldly existence; i. e. धर्म, अर्थ and काम; न बाधते$स्य त्रिगणः परस्परम् Ki.1.11; see त्रिवर्ग below.
    -गत a.
    1 tripled.
    -2 done in three days.
    -गर्ताः (pl.)
    1 N. of a country, also called जलन्धर, in the north- west of India.
    -2 the people or rulers of that country.
    -3 a particular mode of calculation.
    -गर्ता 1 a lascivious woman, wanton.
    -2 a woman in general.
    -3 a pearl.
    -4 a kind of cricket.
    -गुण a.
    1 consisting of three threads; व्रताय मौञ्जीं त्रिगुणां बभार याम् Ku.5.1.
    -2 three-times repeated, thrice, treble, threefold, triple; सप्त व्यतीयुस्त्रिगुणानि तस्य (दिनानि) R.2. 25.
    -3 containing the three Guṇas सत्त्व, रजस् and तमस्. (
    -णम्) the Pradhāna (in Sāṅ. phil.); (-ind.) three times; in three ways.
    -णाः m. (pl.) the three quali- ties or constituents of nature; त्रयीमयाय त्रिगुणात्मने नमः K.1.
    (-णा) 1 Māyā or illusion (in Vedānta phil.).
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -गुणाकृतम् ploughed thrice.
    -चक्षुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -चतुर a. (pl.) three or four; गत्वा जवात्त्रिचतुराणि पदानि सीता B.R.6.34.
    -चत्वा- रिंश a. forty-third.
    -चत्वारिंशत् f, forty-three.
    -जगत् n.
    -जगती the three worlds, (1) the heaven, the atmos- phere and the earth; or (2) the heaven, the earth, and the lower world; त्वत्कीर्तिः...... त्रिजगति विहरत्येवमुर्वीश गुर्वी Sūkti.5.59.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा N. of a female demon, one of the Rākṣasa attendants kept by Rāvaṇa to watch over Sītā, when she was retained as a captive in the Aśoka-vanikā. She acted very kindly towards Sītā and induced her companions to do the same; सीतां मायेति शंसन्ति त्रिजटा समजीवयत् R.12.74.
    -जातम्, जातकम् The three spices (mace, cardamoms, cinnamon).
    -जीवा, -ज्या the sine of three signs or 9˚, a radius.
    -णता a bow; कामुकानिव नालीकांस्त्रिणताः सहसामुचन् Śi.19.61.
    -णव, -णवन् a. (pl.) three times nine; i. e. 27.
    -णाकः the heaven; तावत्त्रिणाकं नहुषः शशास Bhāg.6.13.16.
    -णाचिकेतः 1 a part of the Adhvaryu-sacrifice or Yajur- veda, or one who performs a vow connected therewith (according to Kull. on Ms.3.185); Mb.13.9.26.
    -2 one who has thrice kindled the Nāchiketa fire or studied the Nāchiketa section of Kāṭhaka; त्रिणाचिकेत- स्त्रिभिरेत्य सन्धिम् Kaṭh.1.17.
    -णीता a wife ('thrice married'; it being supposed that a girl belongs to Soma, Gandharva and Agni before she obtains a human husband).
    -णेमि a. with three fellies; विचिन्वतो$भूत् सुमहांस्त्रिणेमिः Bhāg.3.8.2.
    -तक्षम्, तक्षी three carpen- ters taken collectively.
    -दण्डम् 1 the three staves of a Saṁnyāsin (who has resigned the world) tied togethar so as to form one.
    -2 the triple subjection of thought, word, and deed. (
    -ण्डः) the state of a religious ascetic; ज्ञानवैराग्यरहितस्त्रिदण्डमुपजीवति Bhāg.11.18.4.
    -दण्डिन् m.
    1 a religious mendicant or Saṁnyāsin who has renounced all worldly attachments, and who carries three long staves tied together so as to form one in his right hand; तल्लिप्सुः स यतिर्भूत्वा त्रिदण्डी द्वारका- मगात् Bhāg.1.86.3.
    -2 one who has obtained command over his mind, speech, and body (or thought, word, and deed); cf. वाग्दण्डो$थ मनोदण्डः कायदण्डस्तथैव च । यस्यैते निहिता बुद्धौ त्रिदण्डीति स उच्यते ॥ Ms.12.1.
    -दशाः (pl.)
    1 thirty.
    -2 the thirty-three gods:-- 12 Ādityas, 8 Vasus, 11 Rudras and 2 Aśvins. (
    -शः) a god, an immortal; तस्मिन्मघोनस्त्रिदशान्विहाय सहस्रमक्ष्णां युगपत्पपात Ku.3.1. ˚अङ्कुशः (-शम्) the heaven. ˚आयुधम् Indra's thunder- bolt; R.9.54. ˚आयुधम् rainbow; अथ नभस्य इव त्रिदशायुधम् R.9.54. ˚अधिपः, ˚ईश्वरः, ˚पतिः epithets of Indra. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Śiva. ˚अध्यक्षः, ˚अयनः an epithet of Viṣṇu. ˚अरिः a demon. ˚आचार्यः an epithet of Bṛihas- pati. ˚आधार Nectar. ˚आलयः, ˚आवासः
    1 heaven.
    -2 the mountain Meru.
    -3 a god. ˚आहारः 'the food of the gods', nectar. ˚इन्द्रः
    1 Indra.
    -2 Śiva.
    -3 Brahman. ˚गुरुः an epithet of Bṛihaspati, ˚गोपः a kind of insect; (cf. इन्द्रगोप) श्रद्दधे त्रिदशगोपमात्रके दाहशक्तिमिव कृष्णवर्त्मनि R.11.42. ˚दीर्घिका an epithet of the Ganges. ˚पतिः Indra; एषो$प्यैरावतस्थस्त्रिदशपतिः Ratn.4.11. ˚पुङ्गवः Viṣṇu; Rām.1. ˚मञ्जरी the holy basil. ˚वधू, ˚वनिता, an Apsaras or heavenly damsel; कैलासस्य त्रिदशवनितादर्पणस्यातिथिः स्याः Me.6. ˚वर्त्मन् the sky. ˚श्रेष्ठः
    1 Agni.
    -2 Brahman. ˚दशीभूत Become divine; त्रिदशीभूतपौराणां स्वर्गान्तरमकल्पयत् R.15.12.
    -दिनम् three days collectively. ˚स्पृश् m. concurrence of three lunations with one solar day.
    -दिवम् 1 the heaven; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28; Ś.7.3.
    -2 sky, atmosphere.
    -3 paradise.
    -4 happi- ness. (
    -वा) cardamoms. ˚अधीशः, ˚ईशः
    1 an epithet of Indra.
    -2 a god. ˚आलयः the heaven; अश्वमेधजिताँल्लोका- नाप्नोति त्रिदिवालये Mb.13.141.53. ˚उद्भवा
    1 the Ganges.
    -2 small cardamoms. ˚ओकस् m. a god; वपुषि त्रिदिवौकसां परं सह पुष्पैरपतत्र्छिलीमुखाः Vikr.15.72. ˚गत dead; त्रिदिवगतः किमु वक्ष्यते पिता मे Vikr.6.62.
    -दृश् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -दोषम् vitiation or derangement of the three humours of the body, i. e. वात, पित्त and कफ.
    -धा ind. in 3 parts, ways or places; triply, ˚त्वम् tripartition; Ch. Up.
    -धातुः an epithet of Gaṇeśa;
    -तुम् 1 the triple world.
    -2 the aggregate of the 3 minerals or humours.
    -धामन् m.
    1 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -2 of Vyāsa;
    -3 of Śiva.
    -4 of Agni.
    -5 death. -n. the heaven; हंसो हंसेन यानेन त्रिधाम परमं ययौ Bhāg.3.24.2.
    -धारा the Ganges.
    -नयन, -नेत्रः, -लोचनः epithets of Śiva; R.3. 66; Ku.3.66;5.72.
    - नवत a. ninety-third.
    -नवतिः f. ninety three.
    -नयना Pārvat&imacr.
    -नाभः Viṣṇu; Bhāg.8. 17.26.
    -नेत्रचूडामणिः the moon.
    -नेत्रफलः the cocoa-nut tree.
    -पञ्च a. three-fold five, i. e. fifteen.
    -पञ्चाश a. fiftythird.
    -पञ्चाशत् f. fifty-three.
    -पुटः glass (काच).
    -पताकः 1 the hand with three fingers stretched out or erect.
    -2 the forehead marked naturally with three horizontal lines.
    -पत्रकः the Palāśa tree.
    -पथम् 1 the three paths taken collectively, i. e. the sky, atmosphere, and the earth, or the sky, earth and the lower world.
    -2 a place where three roads meet. (
    -था) an epithet of Mathura. ˚गा, ˚गामिनी an epithet of the Ganges; गङ्गा त्रिपथगामिनी; धृतसत्पथस्त्रिपथगामभितः स तमारुरोह पुरुहूतसुतः Ki.6.1; Amaru.99.
    -पद्, -पाद्, -पात् m. Ved.
    1 Viṣṇu.
    -2 fever (personified).
    -पद a. three-footed. (
    -दम्) a tripod; त्रिपदैः करकैः स्थालैः...... Śiva. B.22. 62.
    -पदिका 1 a tripod.
    -2 a stand with three feet.
    -पदी 1 the girth of an elephant; नास्रसत्करिणां ग्रैवं त्रिपदी- च्छेदिनामपि R.4.48.
    -2 the Gāyatrī metre.
    -3 a tripod.
    -4 the plant गोधापदी.
    -परिक्रान्त a. one who walks thrice round a sacred fire.
    -पर्णः Kiṁśuka tree.
    -पाटः 1 intersection of a prolonged side and perpendicular (in a quadrangular figure).
    -2 the figure formed by such intersection.
    -पाटिका a beak.
    पाठिन् a.
    1 familiar with Saṁhitā, Pada, and Krama.
    -2 one who learns a thing after three repetitions.
    -पादः 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 fever.
    -पाद् a.
    1 having three feet.
    -2 con- sisting of three parts, having three fourths; राघवः शिथिलं तस्थौ भुवि धर्मस्त्रिपादिव R.15.96.
    -3 trinomial. (-m.)
    1 an epithet of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation.
    -2 the Supreme Being.
    -पिटकम् the 3 collections of Buddhistic sacred writings (सुत्त, विनय and अभिधम्म).
    -पुट a. triangular.
    (-टः) 1 an arrow.
    -2 the palm of the hand.
    -3 a cubit.
    -4 a bank or shore.
    -पुटकः a triangle.
    -पुटा an epithet of Durgā.
    -पुटिन् m. the castor-oil plant.
    -पुण्ड्रम्, -पुण्ड्रक a mark on the forehead consisting of three lines made with cowdung ashes.
    -पुरम् 1 a collection of three cities.
    -2 the three cities of gold, silver, and iron in the sky, air and earth built for demons by Maya; (these cities were burnt down, along the demons inhabiting them, by Śiva at the request of the gods); Ku.7.48; Amaru.2; संरक्ताभिस्त्रिपुरविजयो गीयते किन्नरीभिः Me.56; Bh.3.123; (
    -रः) N. of a demon or demons presiding over these cities. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Maya, ˚अन्तकः, ˚अरिः, ˚घ्नः, ˚दहनः, ˚द्विष् m., हरः &c. epithets of Śiva; अये गौरीनाथ त्रिपुरहर शम्भो त्रिनयन Bh.3.123; R.17.14. ˚दाहः burning of the three cities; मुहुरनुस्मरयन्तमनुक्षपं त्रिपुरदाहमुमापतिसेविनः Ki.5.14. ˚सुन्दरी Durgā.
    (-री) 1 N. of a place near Jabalpura, formerly capital of the kings of Chedi.
    -2 N. of a country.
    -पुरुष a
    1 having the length of three men.
    -2 having three assistants. (
    -षम्) the three ancestors- father, grand-father and great-grand-father.
    -पृष्ठम् the highest heaven; Bhāg.1.19.23. (
    ष्ठः) Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुष a.
    1 belonging to, or extending over, three generations of men.
    2 offered to three (as oblations).
    -3 inherited from three (as an estate).
    -प्रस्रुतः an elephant in rut.
    -फला (1) the three myrobalans taken collectively, namely, Terminalia Chebula, T. Bellerica, and Phyllanthus (Mar. हिरडा, बेहडा and आंवळकाठी). Also (2) the three sweet fruits (grape, pomegranate, and date); (3) the three fragrant fruits (nutmeg, areca- nut, and cloves).
    -बन्धनः the individual soul.
    -बलिः, बली, -वलिः, -वली f.
    1 the three folds or wrinkles of skin above the navel of a woman (regarded as a mark of beauty); क्षामोदरोपरिलसत्त्रिवलीलतानाम् Bh.1.93,81; cf. Ku.1.39.
    -2 the anus.
    -बलीकम् the anus.
    -बाहुः a kind of fighting with swords.
    -ब्रह्मन् a. with ब्रह्मा, विष्णु and महेश.
    -भम् three signs of the zodiac, or ninety degrees.
    -भङ्गम् a pose in which the image is bent at three parts of the body.
    -भद्रम् copulation, sexual union, cohabitation.
    -भागः 1 the third part; त्रिभागं ब्रह्महत्यायाः कन्या प्राप्नोति दुष्यती Mb.12.165.42.
    -2 the third part of a sign of the zodiac.
    -भुक्ल a. one possessed of learning, good conduct and good family-descent (Dānasāgara, Bibliotheca Indica,274, Fasc.1, p.29).
    -भुजम् a triangle.
    -भुवनम् the three worlds; पुण्यं यायास्त्रिभुवन- गुरोर्धाम चण्डीश्वरस्य Me.35; Bh.1.99. ˚गुरु Śiva. ˚कीर्तिरसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda. ˚पतिः Viṣṇu.
    -भूमः a palace with three floors.
    -मद the three narcotic plants; the three-fold haughtiness; Bhāg.3.1.43.
    -मधु n.
    -मधुरम् 1 sugar, honey, and ghee.
    -2 three verses of the Ṛigveda (1.9.6-8; मधु वाता ऋतायते˚).
    -3 a ceremony based on the same; L. D. B.
    -4 threefold utterance of a vedic stanza ˚मधु वाता -m. a reciter and performer of the above ceremony; L. D. B.
    -मार्गा the Ganges; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28.
    -मुकुटः the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -मुखः an epithet of Buddha.
    -मुनि ind. having the three sages पाणिनि, कात्यायन and पतञ्जलि; त्रिमुनि व्याकरणम्.
    -मूर्तिः 1 the united form of Brahmā, Viṣṇu, and Maheśa, the Hindu triad; नमस्त्रिमूर्तये तुभ्यं प्रांक्सृष्टेः केवलात्मने । गुणत्रयविभायाय पश्चाद्भेदमुपेयुषे ॥ Ku.2.4.
    -2 Buddha, or Jina.
    -मूर्धन् m.
    1 a demon; त्रयश्च दूषण- खरस्त्रिमूर्धानो रणे हताः U.2.15.
    -2 a world called महर्लोक; G&imac;rvāṇa; cf. अमृतं क्षेममभयं त्रिमूर्ध्नो$धायि मूर्धसु Bhāg.2.6.19.
    -यव a. weighing 3 barley corns; Ms.8.134.
    -यष्टिः a necklace of three strings.
    -यामकम् sin.
    -यामा 1 night (consisting of 3 watches of praharas, the first and last half prahara being excluded); संक्षिप्येत क्षण इव कथं दीर्घयामा त्रियामा Me.11, Ku.7.21,26; R.9.7; V.3. 22.
    -2 turmeric.
    -3 the Indigo plant.
    -4 the river Yamuṇā.
    -युगः an epithet of Viṣṇu; धर्मं महापुरुष पासि युगानुवृत्तं छन्नः कलौ यदभवस्त्रियुगो$थ सत्त्वम् Bhāg.7.9.38; the god in the form of यज्ञपुरुष; Bhāg.5.18.35.
    -योनिः a law-suit (in which a person engages from anger, cove- tousness, or infatuation).
    -रसकम् spirituous liquor; see त्रिसरकम्.
    -रात्र a. lasting for three nights. (
    -त्रः) a festival lasting for three nights. (
    -त्रम्) a period of three nights.
    -रेखः a conch-shell.
    -लिङ्ग a. having three genders, i. e. an adjective.
    -2 possessing the three Guṇas. (
    -गाः) the country called Telaṅga. (
    -गी) the three genders taken collectively.
    -लोकम् the three worlds. (
    -कः) an inhabitant of the three worlds; यद्धर्मसूनोर्बत राजसूये निरीक्ष्य दृक्स्वस्त्ययनं त्रिलोकः Bhāg.3. 2.13. ˚आत्मन् m. the Supreme Being. ˚ईशः the sun. ˚नाथः 'lord of the three worlds', an epithet of
    1 Indra; त्रिलोकनाथेन सदा मखद्विषस्त्वया नियम्या ननु दिव्यचक्षुषा R.3.45.
    -2 of Śiva; Ku.5.77. ˚रक्षिन् a. protecting the 3 worlds; त्रिलोकरक्षी महिमा हि वज्रिणः V.1.6.
    -लोकी the three worlds taken collectively, the universe; सत्यामेव त्रिलोकीसरिति हरशिरश्चुम्बिनीविच्छटायाम् Bh.3.95; Śānti.4.22.
    -लोचनः Śiva.
    (-ना) 1 an unchaste woman.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -लोहकम् the three metals:-- gold, silver, and copper.
    -वर्गः 1 the three objects of wordly existence, i. e. धर्म, अर्थ, and काम; अनेन धर्मः सविशेषमद्य मे त्रिवर्गसारः प्रतिभाति भाविनि Ku.5.38; अन्योन्यानुबन्धम् (त्रिवर्गम्) Kau. A.1.7; प्राप त्रिवर्गं बुबुधे$त्रिवर्गम् (मोक्षम्) Bu. Ch.2.41.
    -2 the three states of loss, stability, and increase; क्षयः स्थानं च वृद्धिश्च त्रिवर्गो नीतिवेदिनाम् Ak.
    -3 the three qualities of nature, i. e. सत्त्व, रजस्, and तमस्.
    -4 the three higher castes.
    -5 the three myrobalans.
    -6 propriety, decorum.
    -वर्णकम् the first three of the four castes of Hindus taken collectively.
    -वर्ष a. three years old; Ms.5.7.
    -वलिः, -ली f. (in comp.) three folds over a woman's navel (regarded as a mark of beauty)
    -वली the anus.
    -वारम् ind. three times, thrice.
    -विक्रमः Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf incarnation. ˚रसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda.
    -विद्यः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas.
    -विध a. of three kinds, three-fold.
    -विष्टपम्, -पिष्टपम् 1 the world of Indra, heaven; त्रिविष्टपस्येव पतिं जयन्तः R.6.78.
    -2 the three worlds. ˚सद् m. a god.
    -वृत् a.
    1 threefold; मौञ्जी त्रिवृत्समा श्लक्ष्णा कार्या विप्रस्य मेखला Ms.2.42.
    -2 consisting of three parts (as three गुणs, विद्याs); Bhāg.3.24.33;1.23.39; (consisting of three letters- ओङ्कार); हिरण्यगर्भो वेदानां मन्त्राणां प्रणवस्त्रिवृत् Bhāg.11.16.12. (-m.)
    1 a sacrifice.
    -2 a girdle of three strings; Mb.12.47.44.
    -3 an amulet of three strings. (-f.) a plant possessing valuable purgative properties. ˚करण combining three things, i. e. earth, water, and fire.
    -वृत्तिः livelihood through 3 things (sacrifice, study and alms).
    -वेणिः, -णी f. the place near Prayāga where the Ganges joins the Yamunā and receives under ground the Sarasvatī; the place called दक्षिणप्रयाग where the three sacred rivers separate.
    -वेणुः 1 The staff (त्रिदण्ड) of a Saṁnyāsin; केचित् त्रिवेणुं जगृहुरेके पात्रं कमण्डलुम् Bhāg.11.23.34.
    -2 The pole of a chariot; अथ त्रिवेणुसंपन्नं...... बभञ्ज च महारथम् Rām.3. 51.16; Mb.7.156.83; a three bannered (chariot); Bhāg.4.26.1.
    -वेदः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas.
    -शक्तिः a deity (त्रिकला), Māyā; Bhāg.2.6.31.
    -शङ्कुः 1 N. of a celebrated king of the Solar race, king of Ayodhyā and father of Hariśchandra. [He was a wise, pious, and just king, but his chief fault was that he loved his person to an inordinate degree. Desiring to celebrate a sacrifice by virtue of which he could go up to heaven in his mortal body, he requested his family-priest Vasiṣṭha to officiate for him; but being refused he next requested his hundred sons who also rejected his absurd proposal. He, therefore, called them cowardly and impotent, and was, in return for these insults, cursed and degraded by them to be a Chāṇḍāla. While he was in this wretched condition, Viśvāmitra, whose family Triśaṅku had in times of famine laid under deep obligations, undertook to celebrate the sacrifice, and invited all the gods to be present. They, however, declined; whereupon the enraged Viśvāmitra. by his own power lifted up Triśaṅku to the skies with his cherished mortal body. He began to soar higher and higher till his head struck against the vault of the heaven, when he was hurled down head-foremost by Indra and the other gods. The mighty Viśvāmitra, however, arrested him in his downward course, saying 'Stay Triśaṅku', and the unfortunate monarch remained suspended with his head towards the earth as a constellation in the southern hemisphere. Hence the wellknown proverb:-- त्रिशङ्कुरिवान्तरा तिष्ठ Ś.2.]
    -2 the Chātaka bird.
    -3 a cat.
    -4 a grass-hopper.
    -5 a fire- fly. ˚जः an epithet of Hariśchandra. ˚याजिन् m. an epithet of Viśvāmitra.
    -शत a. three hundred.
    (-तम्) 1 one hundred and three.
    -2 three hundred.
    -शरणः a Buddha.
    -शर्करा three kinds of sugar (गुडोत्पन्ना, हिमोत्था, and मधुरा).
    -शाख a. three-wrinkled; भ्रुकुट्या भीषणमुखः प्रकृत्यैव त्रिशाखया Ks.12.72.
    -शालम् a house with three halls or chambers.
    -शिखम् 1 a trident; तदापतद्वै त्रिशिखं गरुत्मते Bhāg.1.59.9.
    -2 a crown or crest (with three points).
    -शिरस् m.
    1 N. of a demon killed by Rāma.
    -2 an epithet of Kubera.
    -3 fever. त्रिशिरस्ते प्रसन्नो$स्मि व्येतु ते मज्ज्वराद्भयम् Bhāg.1.63.29.
    -शीर्षः Śiva.
    -शीर्षकम्, -शूलम् a trident. ˚अङ्कः, ˚धारिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -शुक्लम् the holy combination of 'three days' viz. Uttarāyaṇa (day of the gods), the bright half of the moon (day of the manes) and day- time; त्रिशुक्ले मरणं यस्य, L. D. B.
    -शूलिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -शृङ्गः 1 the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -2 a triangle.
    -शोकः the soul.
    -षष्टिः f. sixty-three.
    -ष्टुभ् f. a metre of 4 x 11 syllables.
    -संध्यम्, -संध्यी the three periods of the day, i. e. dawn, noon, and sunset; also
    -त्रिसवनम् (
    -षवणम्); Ms.11.216.
    -संध्यम् ind. at the time of the three Sandhyas; सान्निध्यं पुष्करे येषां त्रिसन्ध्यं कुरुनन्दन Mb.
    -सप्तत a. seventy-third.
    -सप्ततिः f. seventy-three.
    -सप्तन्, -सप्त a. (pl.) three times 7, i. e. 21.
    -सम a. (in geom.) having three equal sides, equilateral.
    -सरः milk, sesamum and rice boiled together.
    -सरकम् drinking wine thrice ('सरकं शीधुपात्रे स्यात् शीधुपाने च शीधुनि' इति विश्वः); प्रातिभं त्रिसरकेण गतानाम् Śi.1.12.
    -सर्गः the creation of the 3 Guṇas; Bhāg.1.1.1.
    -साधन a. having a threefold causality; R.3.13.
    -सामन् a. singing 3 Sāmans (an उद्गातृ); उद्गाता तत्र संग्रामे त्रिसामा दुन्दुभिर्नृप Mb.12.98.27.
    -साम्यम् an equilibrium of the three (qualities); Bhāg.2.7.4.
    -सुपर्णः, -र्णम् 1 N. of the three Ṛigvedic verses (Rv.1.114.3-5).
    -2 N. of T. Ār.1.48-5; -a. familiar with or reciting these verses; Ms.3.185.
    -स्थली the three sacred places: काशी, प्रयाग, and गया.
    -स्थानम् the head, neck and chest to- gether; तन्त्रीलयसमायुक्तं त्रिस्थानकरणान्वितम् Rām.7.71.15. -a.
    1 having 3 dwelling places.
    -2 extending through the 3 worlds.
    -स्रोतस् f. an epithet of the Ganges; त्रिस्रोतसं वहति यो गगनप्रतिष्ठाम् Ś.7.6; R.1.63; Ku.7.15.
    -सीत्य, -हल्य a. ploughed thrice (as a field).
    -हायण a. three years old.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > त्रि _tri

  • 5 λόγος

    λόγος, ου, ὁ (verbal noun of λέγω in the sense ‘pick’; Hom.+).
    ① a communication whereby the mind finds expression, word
    ⓐ of utterance, chiefly oral.
    α. as expression, word (oratorical ability plus exceptional performance were distinguishing marks in Hellenic society, hence the frequent association of λ. and ἔργον ‘deed’; a sim. formulation as early as Il. 9, 443 μύθων τε ῥητῆρʼ ἔμεναι πρηκτῆρά τε ἔργων; Polystrat. p. 33 μὴ λόγῳ μόνον ἀλλʼ ἔργω; Just., A II, 4, 2 ἢ λόγῳ ἢ ἔργῳ and D. 35, 7 λόγον ἢ πρᾶξιν) δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ κ. λόγῳ, i.e. an exceptional personage Lk 24:19; pl. of Moses Ac 7:22 (the contrast expressed w. a verb Choix 20, 6–8 ποιεῖ ἀγαθὸν ὄτι δύναται καὶ λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ of Apollordorus, a benefactor in Cyzicus, a flourishing city in Phrygia; sim. New Docs 7, 233, no. 10, 8f πολιτευόμενος … λόγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ; cp. IKourion 32, 8; without contrast Diod S 13, 101, 3 ἄνδρας λόγῳ δυνατούς; for sim. constructions using λέγω and πράσσω s. Danker, Benefactor 339–43). Cp. Ro 15:18; 2 Cor 10:11; Col 3:17; 2 Th 2:17; Hb 13:21 v.l.; 1J 3:18 (cp. Theognis 1, 87f Diehl3 μή μʼ ἔπεσιν μὲν στέργε κτλ.—For the contrast λόγῳ … ἀληθείᾳ cp. Diod S 13, 4, 1). In contrast to a sinful deed we also have the λόγος ἁμαρτίας sinful word Judaicon 172, 9. W. γνῶσις: ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ κ. πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5. ἰδιώτης τῷ λόγῳ, ἀλλʼ οὐ τῇ γνώσει 2 Cor 11:6. (Opp. δύναμις ‘revelation of power’) 1 Cor 4:19, 20. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον οὐκ ἐγενήθη ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει 1 Th 1:5 (cp. Ar. 13, 7 of mythical accounts οὐδέν εἰσιν εἰ μὴ μόνον λόγοι ‘they’re nothing but words’). W. ἐπιστολή: 2 Th 2:2, 15. W. ἀναστροφή: 1 Ti 4:12; 1 Pt 3:1b. Opp. ‘be silent’: IRo 2:1.—μόνον εἰπὲ λόγῳ just say the word Mt 8:8; cp. Lk 7:7 (Ath. 17, 1 ὡς λόγῳ εἰπεῖν; 29, 2; Phalaris, Ep. 121, 1 λόγῳ λέγειν; cp. schol. on Pla. 341a ἐν λόγῳ μόνον εἰπεῖν). οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον no one was able to answer him a (single) word Mt 22:46; cp. 15:23 (cp. TestAbr A 16 p. 98, 11 [Stone p. 44] οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ λόγον).— The (mighty) word (of one who performs miracles) ἐξέβαλεν τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ Mt 8:16 (a rare use of λ. as ‘single utterance’, s. L-S-J-M s.v. VII).—διὰ λόγου by word of mouth (opp. ‘by letter’) Ac 15:27.—In the textually uncertain pass. Ac 20:24 the text as it stands in N., οὐδενὸς λόγου (v.l. λόγον) ποιοῦμαι τὴν ψυχὴν τιμίαν, may well mean: I do not consider my life worth a single word (cp. λόγου ἄξιον [ἄξιος 1a] and our ‘worth mention’; s. Conzelmann ad loc.).
    β. The expression may take on a variety of formulations or topical nuances: what you say Mt 5:37; statement (PGM 4, 334) Lk 20:20; question (Sext. Emp., Math. 8, 295; 9, 133; Diog. L. 2, 116) ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς λόγον I will ask you a question (cp. TestJob 36:5; GrBar 5:1; ApcSed 13:6; Jos., Ant. 12, 99) Mt 21:24; cp. Mk 11:29; Lk 20:3; prayer (PGM 1, 25; 4, 90; 179; 230 al.; 5, 180; 196 al.) Mt 26:44; Mk 14:39. ἡγούμενος τοῦ λ. principal speaker Ac 14:12. W. epexeget. gen. λ. παρακλήσεως 13:15. W. κήρυγμα our manner of presentation and our proclamation 1 Cor 2:4a (but s. comm.). (W. διδασκαλία) preaching 1 Ti 5:17; prophecy (Biogr. p. 364 [Pythia]) J 2:22; 18:32. Command (Aeschyl., Pers. 363) Lk 4:36; 2 Pt 3:5, 7; via a letter 2 Th 3:14. Report, story (X., An. 1, 4, 7; Diod S 3, 40, 9; 19, 110, 1 λ. διαδιδόναι=spread a report; Appian, Iber. 80 §346, Maced. 4 §1 [both=rumor]; Diod S 32, 15, 3 ἦλθεν ὁ λ. ἐπί τινα=the report came to someone; Arrian, Anab. 7, 22, 1 λόγος λέγεται τοιόσδε=a story is told like this, Ind. 9, 2; Diod S 3, 18, 3 λ.=story, account; Jos., Ant. 19, 132; Tat. 27, 2 τοῦ καθʼ Ἡρακλέα λόγου) Mt 28:15; Mk 1:45; Lk 5:15 (λ. περί τινος as X., An. 6, 6, 13; Jos., Ant. 19, 127) 7:17; J 21:23. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τ. ἐκκλησίας the report came to the ears of the assembly in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. λόγον ἔχειν σοφίας have the appearance of wisdom, pass for wisdom Col 2:23 (cp. Pla., Epinomis 987b ἔχει λόγον; Demosth., C. Lept. 462 [20, 18] λόγον τινʼ ἔχον; but mng. 2f is possible). Proverb (Pla., Phdr. 17, 240c, Symp. 18, 195b, Gorg. 54, 499c, Leg. 6, 5, 757a; Socrat., Ep. 22, 1) J 4:37 (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 13, 7 ἀληθῶς ἐν τούτῳ ὁ λ. foll. by a proverb). Proclamation, instruction, teaching, message Lk 4:32; 10:39; J 4:41; 17:20; Ac 2:41; 4:4; 10:44; 20:7; 1 Cor 1:17; 2:1. In Ac18:15 ζητήματα περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου the sense appears to be someth. like this: controversial issues involving disputes about words and your way of life with λ. prob. referring to the presentation of controversial subjects, which in turn arouses heated ζητήματα debates. λόγος σοφίας proclamation of wisdom, speaking wisely 1 Cor 12:8a (Ps.-Phoc. 129 τῆς θεοπνεύστου σοφίης λ.); corresp. λ. γνώσεως vs. 8b. Cp. 14:9; 15:2; 2 Cor 1:18; 6:7; 10:10. λ. μαρτυρίας word of witness Rv 12:11. ὁ κατὰ τ. διδαχὴν πιστὸς λ. the message of faith, corresponding to the teaching Tit 1:9; the opp. 2 Ti 2:17. A speech (Aristot. p. 14b, 2; Diod S 40, 5a) διὰ λόγου πολλοῦ in a long speech Ac 15:32; cp. 20:2. λ. κολακείας flattering speech 1 Th 2:5. Speaking gener. 2 Cor 8:7; Eph 6:19; Col 4:6; D 2:5. ἐν λόγῳ πταίειν make a mistake in what one says Js 3:2.—Of God’s word, command, commission (LXX; ParJer 5:19 κατηχῆσαι αὐτοὺς τὸν λόγον; SyrBar 13:2; ApcSed 14:10; Just., D. 84, 2; Ael. Aristid. hears a ἱερὸς λ. at night fr. a god: 28, 116 K.=49, p. 529 D.; Sextus 24) ἠκυρώσατε τ. λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ Mt 15:6 (v.l. νόμον, ἐντολήν); cp. Mk 7:13.—J 5:38; 8:55; 10:35; Ro 3:4 (Ps 50:6). Of God’s promise Ro 9:6, 9 (but these two vss., and Gal 5:14 below, prob. fit better under 2a), 28 (Is 10:22f). Cp. Hb 2:2; 4:2 (s. ἀκοή 4b); 7:28; 12:19. For B 15:1 see 1aδ. The whole law (as the expr. εἴ τι ἑτέρα ἐντολή indicates not limited to a narrow list of commandments), acc. to Ro 13:9. In what is prob. a play on words (s. 2a and b), Gal 5:14 (s. 2a below) is summed up in the λόγος as expressed in Lev 19:18.—That which God has created ἁγιάζεται διὰ λόγου θεοῦ 1 Ti 4:5; in line w. the context, this hardly refers to God’s creative word (so SibOr 3, 20; PtK 2; πάντα γὰρ λόγῳ ποιήσας ὁ θεός Theoph. Ant. 2, 18 [144, 8]), but to table prayers which use biblical expressions. The divine word as judge of thoughts Hb 4:12. τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ Ac 17:17; cp. 19:9.—Of the divine revelation through Christ and his messengers (Just., A I, 61, 9 λόγον … παρὰ τῶν ἀποστόλων ἐμάθομεν τοῦτον) θεὸς ἐφανέρωσεν τὸν λ. αὐτοῦ ἐν κηρύγματι Tit 1:3. δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν λ. σου J 17:14; cp. vss. 6, 17; 1J 1:10; 2:14. ἵνα μὴ ὁ λ. τοῦ θεοῦ βλασφημῆται Tit 2:5. The apostles and other preachers, w. ref. to the λόγος of God, are said to: λαλεῖν Ac 4:29, 31; 13:46; Phil 1:14; Hb 13:7; καταγγέλλειν Ac 13:5; 17:13; διδάσκειν 18:11; μαρτυρεῖν Rv 1:2. Of their hearers it is said: τὸν λ. τοῦ θεοῦ ἀκούειν Ac 13:7; δέχεσθαι 8:14; 11:1. Of the λ. τοῦ θεοῦ itself we read: ηὔξανεν Ac 6:7; 12:24; 19:20; οὐ δέδεται 2 Ti 2:9. In these places and many others ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ is simply the Christian message, the gospel: Lk 5:1; 8:11, 21; 11:28 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 1, 20 μὴ μόνον ἀκουόντων ἀλλὰ πασχόντων καὶ ὑπὸ τῶν λόγων=let the message have its effect on oneself); Ac 6:2 (s. καταλείπω 7c; for prob. commercial metaph. s. 2a below); 13:44 v.l. (for κυρίου); 16:32 v.l.; 1 Cor 14:36; 2 Cor 2:17; 4:2; Col 1:25; 1 Pt 1:23; Rv 1:9; 6:9; 20:4; IPhld 11:1. Cp. 1 Th 2:13ab; 1J 2:5.—Since this ‘divine word’ is brought to humanity through Christ, his word can be used in the same sense: ὁ λόγος μου J 5:24; cp. 8:31, 37, 43, 51f; 12:48; 14:23f; 15:3, 20b; Rv 3:8. ὁ λόγος τοῦ Χριστοῦ Col 3:16; cp. Hb 6:1. ὁ λ. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 8:25; 12:24 v.l.; 13:44, 48f; 14:25 v.l.; 15:35, 36; 16:32 (cp. λ. θεοῦ); 19:10; 1 Th 1:8; 2 Th 3:1. Pl. Mk 8:38 (Lk 9:26); 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Lk 24:44; s. also 1aδ.—Or it is called simply ὁ λόγος=the ‘Word’, for no misunderstanding would be possible among Christians: Mt 13:20–23; Mk 2:2; 4:14–20, 33; 8:32 (s. 1aε below); 16:20; Lk 1:2; 8:12f, 15; Ac 6:4; 8:4; 10:36 (on the syntax s. FNeirynck, ETL 60, ’84, 118–23); 11:19; 14:25 (cp. λ. κυρίου above); 16:6; 17:11; 18:5; Gal 6:6; Phil 1:14; Col 4:3; 1 Th 1:6; 2 Ti 4:2; Js 1:21ff; 1 Pt 2:8; 3:1; 1J 2:7; AcPl Ha 7, 6 (so also Mel., HE 4, 26, 13; Ath. 2, 3).—Somet. the ‘Word’ is more closely defined by a gen.: ὁ λ. τῆς βασιλείας the word of the reign/rule (of God) Mt 13:19. τῆς σωτηρίας Ac 13:26. τῆς καταλλαγῆς 2 Cor 5:19. τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 Cor 1:18. δικαιοσύνης (q.v. 3a) Hb 5:13. ζωῆς Phil 2:16. (τῆς) ἀληθείας (Theoph. Ant. 3, 4 [p. 212, 2]; cp. περὶ ἀληθείας Hippol., Ref. 10, 6, 1) Eph 1:13; Col 1:5; 2 Ti 2:15; Js 1:18; AcPl Ha 8, 8 (Just., D. 121, 2). τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ (=τοῦ κυρίου) Ac 14:3; 20:32. (Differently the pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. χάριτος gracious words Lk 4:22; cp. Marcellinus, Vi. Thu. 57 Hude λόγοι εἰρωνείας.) ὁ λ. τοῦ εὐαγγελίου Ac 15:7; ὁ τοῦ Χριστιανισμοῦ λ. MPol 10:1. In Rv 3:10 the gospel is described by the ‘One who has the key of David’ as ὁ λ. τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου my word of endurance (W-S. §30, 12c). λ. τῶν ὑ[πο]μονῶν AcPl Ha 6, 11. παρελάβετε τὸν λ. ὅτι AcPl Ha 8, 25.—The pastoral letters favor the expr. πιστὸς ὁ λόγος (sc. ἐστίν, and s. πιστός 1b) 1 Ti 1:15; 3:1; 4:9; 2 Ti 2:11; Tit 3:8; cp. Rv 21:5; 22:6. λ. ὑγιής sound preaching Tit 2:8; cp. the pl. ὑγιαίνοντες λόγοι 2 Ti 1:13 (on medicinal use of words for the mind or soul s. VLeinieks, The City of Dionysos ’96, 115–22, on Eur.).—The pl. is also used gener. of Christian teachings, the words of the gospel Lk 1:4 (s. κατηχέω 2a); 1 Th 4:18. οἱ λ. τῆς πίστεως 1 Ti 4:6. On λόγοι κυριακοί for λόγια κυριακά in the title of the Papias document s. ἐξήγησις 2.—JSchniewind, Die Begriffe Wort und Evangelium bei Pls, diss. Bonn 1910; RAsting (εὐαγγέλιον, end).
    γ. of an individual declaration or remark: assertion, declaration, speech ἀκούσαντες τὸν λ. when they heard the statement Mt 15:12; cp. 19:11, 22; 22:15; Mk 5:36. διὰ τοῦτον τὸν λ. because of this statement of yours 7:29 (TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 29 [Stone p. 38] τὸν λ. τοῦτον; ApcMos 25 εἰς τὸν λόγον σου κρινῶ σε). Cp. 10:22; 12:13; Lk 1:29; 22:61 v.l. (for ῥήματος); J 4:39, 50; 6:60; 7:36, 40 v.l.; 15:20a; 18:9; 19:8; Ac 6:5; 7:29; 20:38; 22:22; 1 Th 4:15. ὸ̔ς ἐὰν εἴπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου whoever utters a (defamatory) word against the Son of Humanity Mt 12:32 (λ. εἰπεῖν κατά τινος as Jos., Ant. 15, 81); cp. Lk 12:10. λόγος σαπρός unwholesome talk Eph 4:29. λόγον ποιεῖσθαι make a speech Ac 11:2 D (cp. Hyperid. 3, 20; Jos., Ant. 11, 86).
    δ. the pl. (οἱ) λόγοι is used, on the one hand, of words uttered on various occasions, of speeches or instruction given here and there by humans or transcendent beings (TestAbr A 14 p. 94, 19 [Stone p. 36]; Jos., Ant. 4, 264; Just., D. 100, 3) ἐκ τῶν λόγων σου δικαιωθήσῃ (καταδικασθήσῃ) Mt 12:37ab; 24:35; Mk 13:31; Lk 21:33; Ac 2:40; 7:22 (ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ. On the word-deed pair cp. Dio Chrys. 4, 6 the λόγοι and ἔργα of Diogenes; s. α above). οἱ δέκα λόγοι the ten commandments (Ex 34:28; Dt 10:4; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 168, Decal. 32; Jos., Ant. 3, 138; cp. 91f; Did., Gen. 36, 10) B 15:1. Ac 15:24; 20:35; 1 Cor 2:4b, 13; 14:19ab; κενοὶ λ. Eph 5:6; AcPl Ox 6, 13 (cp. Aa 1, 241, 14); Dg 8:2; πλαστοὶ λ. 2 Pt 2:3. λ. πονηροί 3J 10.—Also of words and exprs. that form a unity, whether it be connected discourse (Jos., Ant. 15, 126; Just., A II, 12, 6, D. 11, 5; 81, 3 al.), a conversation, or parts of one and the same teaching, or expositions on the same subject (Diod S 16, 2, 3 μετέσχε τῶν Πυθαγορίων λόγων; Dio Chrys. 37 [54], 1; Ael. Aristid. 50, 55 K.=26 p. 519 D.: οἱ Πλάτωνος λόγοι; PsSol 17:43 [words of the Messiah]; AscIs 3:12 οἱ λόγοι τοῦ Βελχειρά) πᾶς ὅστις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους Mt 7:24; cp. vss. 26, 28; 10:14; 19:1; 26:1; Mk 10:24; Lk 1:20; 6:47; 9:28, 44. ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν ἐν λόγοις ἱκανοῖς he questioned him at some length 23:9. τίνες οἱ λ. οὗτοι οὓς ἀντιβάλλετε; what is this conversation that you are holding? 24:17; J 7:40 (s. γ); 10:19; J 14:24a; 19:13; Ac 2:22; 5:5, 24; 16:36; 2 Ti 4:15; 1 Cl 13:1; 46:7. λόγοις φθοριμαίοις AcPlCor 1:2.
    ε. the subject under discussion, matter, thing gener. (Theognis 1055 Diehl; Hdt. 8, 65 μηδενὶ ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἴπῃς. Cp. Hebr. דָּבָר) τὸν λ. ἐκράτησαν they took up the subject Mk 9:10; cp. Mt. 21:24 (s. 1aβ beg.). οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ you have no share in this matter Ac 8:21. ἰδεῖν περὶ τ. λόγου τούτου look into this matter 15:6. ἔχειν πρός τινα λόγον have a complaint against someone (cp. Demosth. 35, 55 ἐμοὶ πρὸς τούτους ὁ λόγος; PIand 16, 3 δίκαιον λόγον ἔχει πρὸς σέ) 19:38. παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (2d is also prob.).—Perh. also Mk 8:32 he discussed the subject quite freely (but s. 1aβ above).
    ⓑ of literary or oratorical productions: of the separate books of a work (Hdt. 5, 36 ἐν τῷ πρώτῳ τ. λόγων; Pla., Parmen. 2, 127d ὁ πρῶτος λόγος; Philo, Omn. Prob. Lib. 1 ὁ μὲν πρότερος λόγος ἦν ἡμῖν, ὦ Θεόδοτε, περὶ τοῦ …) treatise Ac 1:1 (s. on the prologue to Ac: AHilgenfeld, ZWT 41, 1898, 619ff; AGercke, Her 29, 1894, 373ff; RLaqueur, Her 46, 1911, 161ff; Norden, Agn. Th. 311ff; JCreed, JTS 35, ’34, 176–82; Goodsp., Probs. 119–21). Παπίας … πέντε λόγους κυριακῶν λογίων ἔγραψεν Papias (11:1; cp. 3:1 e; 11:2; 12:2).—περὶ οὗ πολὺς ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος about this we have much to say Hb 5:11. Hb is described as ὁ λ. τῆς παρακλήσεως a word of exhortation (in literary form) 13:22. Of writings that are part of Holy Scripture ὁ λ. Ἠσαί̈ου J 12:38. ὁ λ. ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ γεγραμμένος 15:25; ὁ προφητικὸς λ. 2 Pt 1:19; 2 Cl 11:2 (quot. of unknown orig.); AcPl Ha 8, 27/BMM recto 35 (Just., D. 77, 2 al.). ὁ ἅγιος λ. the holy word 1 Cl 56:3. ὁ λ. ὁ γεγραμμένος 1 Cor 15:54 (Is 25:8 and Hos 13:14 follow). Pl. οἱ λόγοι τ. προφητῶν Ac 15:15. ὡς γέγραπται ἐν βίβλῳ λόγων Ἠσαί̈ου Lk 3:4 (Pla., 7th Epistle 335a πείθεσθαι ἀεὶ χρὴ τοῖς παλαιοῖς καὶ ἱεροῖς λόγοις; TestJob 1:1 βίβλος λόγων Ἰώβ; ParJer 9:32 v.l. τὰ λοιπὰ τῶν λόγων Ἱερεμίου; ApcEsdr 1:1 καὶ ἀποκάλυψις τοῦ … Ἐσδράμ; ApcSed prol.; Just., D. 72, 3f).—Of the content of Rv: ὁ ἀναγινώσκων τ. λόγους τῆς προφητείας 1:3. οἱ λόγοι (τ. προφητείας) τ. βιβλίου τούτου 22:7, 9f, 18f.
    ② computation, reckoning
    ⓐ a formal accounting, esp. of one’s actions, and freq. with fig. extension of commercial terminology account, accounts, reckoning λόγον δοῦναι (Hdt. 8, 100; X., Cyr. 1, 4, 3; Diod S 3, 46, 4; SIG 1099, 16; BGU 164, 21; Jos., Ant. 16, 120; Just., D. 115, 6) give account, make an accounting ἕκαστος περὶ ἑαυτοῦ λόγον δώσει τ. θεῷ Ro 14:12. Also λ. ἀποδοῦναι abs. (Just., D. 116, 1 al.; Diod S 16, 56, 4; 19, 9, 4) Hb 13:17. τινί to someone (Diod S 16, 27, 4; Plut., Alcib. 7, 3; Chariton 7, 6, 2; SIG 631, 13 τᾷ πόλει; 2 Ch 34:28; Da 6:3 Theod.; Jos., Bell. 1, 209) τῷ ἑτοίμως ἔχοντι κρῖναι 1 Pt 4:5. τινὸς of someth. (SIG 1044, 46; 1105, 10 τοῦ ἀναλώματος; Jos., Ant. 19, 307) Lk 16:2 (here λ. w. the art.; on the subject of undergoing an audit cp. Aeschin. 3, 22). Likew. περί τινος (Diod S 18, 60, 2 δοὺς αὑτῷ περὶ τούτων λόγον=taking account [considering] with himself; BGU 98, 25 περὶ τούτου) Mt 12:36; Ac 19:40. ὑπέρ τινος concerning someone Hv 3, 9, 10.—αἰτεῖν τινα λόγον περί τινος call someone to account for someth. 1 Pt 3:15 (cp. Pla., Pol. 285e; Dio Chrys. 20 [37], 30; Apc4Esdr Fgm. b ἕκαστος ὑπὸ τοῦ οἰκείου ἔργου τὸν λόγον ἀπαιτηθήσεται; Just., A I, 17, 4. For another perspective s. d below.).—Of banking responsibility ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ (PStras 72, 10 [III A.D.] ὁ τῶν θεῶν λ.; PHerm 108 [III A.D.] λ. τοῦ Σαραπείου) in wordplay Ac 6:2 (w. τράπεζα q.v. 1c); s. also 1aβ.—Of a ledger heading (POxy 1333 [II/III A.D.] δὸς αὐτῳ λόγῳ θεωρικῶν=credit him under ‘festivals’; for others s. Preisig., Wörterbuch s.v. λ. 14; s. also Fachwörter 119) Ro 9:6 (the point is that God’s ‘list’ of Israelites is accurate; on ἐκπίπτω in the sense ‘is not deficient’ s. s.v. 4); vs. 9 (the ‘count’ is subsumed by metonymy in divine promise); Gal 5:14 (all moral obligations come under one ‘entry’: ‘you shall love your neighbor as yourself’; for commercial association of ἀναλίσκω vs. 15, which rounds out the wordplay, s. s.v.). The contexts of these three passages suggest strong probability for commercial associations; for another view s. 1aβ.
    ⓑ settlement (of an account) (εἰς λόγον commercial t.t. ‘in settlement of an account’ POxy 275, 19; 21) εἰς λόγον δόσεως κ. λήμψεως in settlement of a mutual account (lit., ‘of giving and receiving’, ‘of debit and credit’) Phil 4:15 (cp. Plut., Mor. 11b λόγον δοῦναι καὶ λαβεῖν; a parallel formulation POxy 1134,10 [421 A.D.] λ. λήμματος καὶ ἐξοδιασμοῦ=ledger of income and expenditures); for the linked accounting terms δόσις and λήμψις s. PCairMasp 151, 208 [VI A.D.]. The same ideas are in the background of εἰς λόγον ὑμῶν credited to your account vs 17.—συναίρειν λόγον settle accounts (BGU 775, 18f. The mid. in the same mng. PFay109, 6 [I A.D.]; POxy 113, 27f.—Dssm., LO 94 [LAE 118f]) μετά τινος Mt 18:23; 25:19.
    ⓒ reflection, respect, regard εἰς λόγον τινός with regard to, for the sake of (Thu. 3, 46, 4; Demosth. 19, 142 εἰς ἀρετῆς λόγον; Polyb. 11, 28, 8; Ath. 31, 1; Ael. Aristid. 39 p. 743 D.: εἰς δεινότητος λ.) εἰς λ. τιμῆς IPhld 11:2. εἰς λ. θεοῦ ISm 10:1.
    ⓓ reason for or cause of someth., reason, ground, motive (Just., D. 94, 3 δότε μοι λόγον, ὅτου χάριν … ; Ath. 30, 3 τὶς γὰρ … λόγος; Dio Chrys. 64 [14], 18 ἐκ τούτου τ. λόγου; Appian, Hann. 29 §126 τῷ αὐτῷ λόγῳ; Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 28, 155) τίνι λόγω; for what reason? Ac 10:29 (cp. Pla., Gorg. 512c τίνι δικαίῳ λ.; Appian, Mithrid. 57 §232 τίνι λόγῳ;). λόγον περὶ τῆς ἐν ὑμῖν ἐλπίδος 1 Pt 3:15 (but s. a above); κατὰ λόγον Ac 18:14 (s. κατά B 5bβ). παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας Mt 5:32; 19:9 v.l. (though 1aε is also poss.).
    ⓔ πρὸς ὸ̔ν ἡμῖν ὁ λόγος (ἐστίν) with whom we have to do (i.e. to reckon) (Dio Chrys. 31, 123; other exx. in FBleek, Hb II/1, 1836, 590ff), in his capacity as judge (Libanius, Legat. Ulixis [=Declamatio IV] 2 F. τοῖς δὲ ἀδίκως ἀποκτενοῦσι καὶ πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ὁ λόγος γίγνεται) Hb 4:13. οὐ πρὸς σάρκα ὁ λόγος, ἀλλὰ πρὸς θεόν he has to do not with flesh, but with God IMg 3:2.
    ⓕ In Col 2:23 (s. 1aβ) λόγον μὲν ἔχοντα σοφίας may= make a case for wisdom (cp. λόγος ἡμῖν οὐδείς Plut., Mor. 870b).
    ③ the independent personified expression of God, the Logos. Our lit. shows traces of a way of thinking that was widespread in contemporary syncretism, as well as in Jewish wisdom lit. and Philo, the most prominent feature of which is the concept of the Logos, the independent, personified ‘Word’ (of God): GJs 11:2 (word of the angel to Mary) συνλήμψῃ ἐκ Λόγου αὐτοῦ (sc. τοῦ πάντων Δεσπότου). J 1:1abc, 14 (cp. Just., A I, 23, 2; Mel., P. 9, 61 and oft. by all apolog., exc.. Ar.). It is the distinctive teaching of the Fourth Gospel that this divine ‘Word’ took on human form in a historical person, that is, in Jesus (s. RSeeberg, Festgabe für AvHarnack ’21, 263–81.—Λόγος w. ζωή in gnostic speculation: Iren.1, 1, 1 [Harv. 1, 10, 4]; Aelian, VH 4, 20 ἐκάλουν τὸν Πρωταγόραν Λόγον. Similarly Favorinus [II A.D.]: Vorsokr. 80 A 1 ln. 22 [in Diog. L. 9, 50] of Democritus: ἐκαλεῖτο Σοφία. Equating a divinity with an abstraction that she personifies: Artem. 5, 18 φρόνησις εἶναι νομίζεται ἡ θεός [Athena]). Cp. 1J 1:1; Rv 19:13. εἷς θεός ἐστιν, ὁ φανερώσας ἑαυτὸν διὰ Ἰ. Χριστοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν αὐτοῦ λόγος, ἀπὸ σιγῆς προελθών there is one God, who has revealed himself through Jesus Christ his Son, who is his ‘Word’ proceeding from silence (i.e., without an oral pronouncement: in a transcendent manner) IMg 8:2 (s. σιγή). The Lord as νόμος κ. λόγος PtK 1. Cp. Dg 11:2, 3, 7, 8; 12:9.—HClavier, TManson memorial vol., ’59, 81–93: the Alexandrian eternal λόγος is also implied in Hb 4:12; 13:7.—S. also the ‘Comma Johanneum’ (to the bibliography in RGG3 I, ’54 [HGreeven] add AJülicher, GGA 1905, 930–35; AvHarnack, SBBerlAk 1915, 572f [=Studien I ’31, 151f]; MMeinertz, Einl. in d. NT4 ’33, 309–11; AGreiff, TQ 114, ’33, 465–80; CDodd, The Joh. Epistles ’46; WThiele, ZNW 50, ’59, 61–73) ὁ πατήρ, ὁ λόγος καὶ τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα 1J 5:7 v.l. (s. N. app.; Borger, TRu 52, ’87, 57f). (Such interpolations were not unheard of. According to Diog. L. 1, 48 some people maintain that Solon inserted the verse mentioning the Athenians after Il. 2, 557.—τῆς τριάδος, τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ λόγου αὐτοῦ καὶ τῆς σοφίας αὐτοῦ Theoph. Ant. 2, 15 [p. 138, 19].)—On the Logos: EZeller, D. Philosophie der Griechen III 24 1903, 417–34; MHeinze, D. Lehre v. Logos in d. griech. Philosophie 1872; PWendland, Philo u. d. kynisch-stoische Diatribe (Beiträge z. Gesch. der griech. Philosophie u. Religion by Wendl. and OKern 1895, 1–75); AAall, Gesch. d. Logosidee 1896, 1899; MPohlenz, D. Stoa ’48f, I 482; 490 (index); LDürr, D. Wertung des göttl. Wortes im AT u. im ant. Orient ’38 (§9 of the Joh. Logos); EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1907, 83–111; (2 ’25); JLebreton, Les théories du Logos au début de l’ère chrétienne 1907; ESchwartz, NGG 1908, 537–56; GVos, The Range of the Logos-Title in the Prologue of the Fourth Gospel: PTR 11, 1913, 365–419; 557–602; RHarris, The Origin of the Prologue to St. John’s Gospel 1917, Athena, Sophia and the Logos: BJRL 7, 1, 1922 p. 56–72; M-JLagrange, Vers le Logos de S. Jean: RB 32, 1923, 161–84, Le Logos de Philon: ibid. 321–71; HLeisegang, Logos: Pauly-W. XIII 1926, 1035–81; TGlasson, Heraclitus’ Alleged Logos Doctr., JTS 3, ’52, 231–38.—NWeinstein, Z. Genesis d. Agada 1901, 29–90; Billerb. II 302–33.—Rtzst., Zwei religionsgeschichtl. Fragen 1901, 47–132, Mysterienrel.3 1927, 428 index; WBousset, Kyrios Christos2 1921, 304ff; 316f; JKroll, D. Lehren d. Hermes Trismegistos1914, 418 index.—RBultmann, D. religionsgesch. Hintergrund des Prol. z. Joh.: HGunkel Festschr., 1923, II 1–26, Comm. ’41, 5ff; AAlexander, The Johannine Doctrine of the Logos: ET 36, 1925, 394–99; 467–72; (Rtzst. and) HSchaeder, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, 306–37; 350; GAvdBerghvanEysinga, In den beginne was de Logos: NThT 23, ’34, 105–23; JDillersberger, Das Wort von Logos ’35; RBury, The 4th Gosp. and the Logos-Doctrine ’40; EMay, CBQ 8, ’46, 438–47; GKnight, From Moses to Paul ’49, 120–29. TW IV 76–89; 126–40 (on this s. SLyonnet, Biblica 26, ’45, 126–31); CStange, ZST 21, ’50, 120–41; MBoismard, Le Prologue de St. Jean ’53; HLangkammer, BZ 9, ’65, 91–94; HRinggren, Word and Wisdom [hypostatization in Near East] ’47; WEltester, Haenchen Festschr., ’64, 109–34; HWeiss, Untersuchungen zur Kosmologie etc., TU 97, ’66, 216–82; MRissi, Die Logoslieder im Prolog des vierten Evangeliums, TZ 31, ’75, 321–36; HLausberg, NAWG, Ph. ’87, 1 pp. 1–7.—B. 1262. DELG s.v. λέγω B 1. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > λόγος

  • 6 ὄνομα

    ὄνομα, ατος, τό (Hom.+).
    ① proper name of an entity, name
    ⓐ gener. τῶν ἀποστόλων τὰ ὀνόματα ἐστιν ταῦτα Mt 10:2; cp. Rv 21:14. τῶν παρθένων τὰ ὀν. Hs 9, 15, 1. τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ πατρός Lk 1:59. ὄν. μοι, sc. ἐστίν, my name is (Od. 9, 366) Mk 5:9b. τί ὄν. σοι; what is your name? vs. 9a; w. copula Lk 8:30.—The expressions ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν., οὗ τὸ ὄν., καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (αὐτῆς), ὄν. αὐτῷ (parenthetic) are almost always without the copula (B-D-F §128, 3; Rob. 395): ᾧ (ᾗ) ὄν. (Sb 7573, 13 [116 A.D.]; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac.; Just., A I, 53, 8 ᾧ ὄν. Λώτ) Lk 1:26, 27a; 2:25; 8:41; 24:13, 18 v.l.; Ac 13:6.—οὗ τὸ ὄν. (without a verb as BGU 344, 1) Mk 14:32. Cp. ὧν τὰ ὀνόματα ἐν βίβλῳ ζωῆς Phil 4:3 (ὧν τὰ ὀν. is a formula [Dssm., LO 95=LAE 121]. S. esp. BGU 432 II, 3 ὧν τὰ ὀν. τῷ βιβλιδίῳ δεδήλωται).—καὶ τὸ ὄν. αὐτῆς Lk 1:5b. καὶ τὸ ὄν. τῆς παρθένου Μαριάμ vs. 27b.—ὄν. αὐτῷ (Demosth. 32, 11 Ἀριστοφῶν ὄνομʼ αὐτῷ; Dionys. Hal. 8, 89, 4; Aelian, NA 8, 2 γυνὴ … Ἡρακληὶς ὄν. αὐτῇ; LXX) J 1:6; 3:1. ὁ καθήμενος ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ (i.e. τοῦ ἵππου), ὄν. αὐτῷ (ὁ) θάνατος Rv 6:8; cp. 9:11a.—W. the copula ἦν δὲ ὄν. τῷ δούλῳ Μάλχος J 18:10 (POxy 465, 12 ὁ δὲ κραταιὸς αὐτοῦ, ὄν. αὐτῷ ἐστιν Νεβύ, μηνύει; Jos., Ant. 19, 332). ἄγγελος …, οὗ τὸ ὄν. ἐστιν Θεγρί Hv 4, 2, 4.—The dat. is quite freq. ὀνόματι named, by name (X., Hell. 1, 6, 29 Σάμιος ὀνόματι Ἱππεύς; Tob 6:11 BA; 4 Macc 5:4; Just., D. 85, 6; 115, 3; B-D-F §160; 197; Rob. 487) ἄνθρωπον ὀν. Σίμωνα Mt 27:32; cp. Mk 5:22; Lk 1:5a; 5:27; 10:38; 16:20; 23:50; 24:18; Ac 5:1, 34; 8:9; 9:10–12, 33, 36; 10:1; 11:28; 12:13; 16:1, 14; 17:34; 18:2, 7, 24; 19:24; 20:9; 21:10; 27:1; 28:7; MPol 4. Also the acc. τοὔνομα (on the crasis s. B-D-F §18; Mlt-H. 63; FPreisigke, Griech. Urkunden des ägypt. Mus. zu Kairo [1911] 2, 6 γυνὴ Ταμοῦνις τοὔνομα; Diod S 2, 45, 4 πόλιν τοὔνομα Θ.; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 3; Philo, Leg. All. 1, 68; Jos., Ant. 7, 344, Vi. 382) named, by name (the acc. as X. et al., also 2 Macc 12:13; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 Jac. υἱὸν ὄ. Δάν.—B-D-F §160; Rob. 487) Mt 27:57. (Cp. ὄν. gener. as ‘mode of expression’ εἰ καὶ διάφορα ὀνόματα ἐστιν, ἀλλʼ … οἰκείαν … δέχεται τὴν νόησιν although there are various ways of expressing it, it nevertheless has a definite sense Did., Gen. 86, 22 [of various metaphors and images for the soul].)
    ⓑ used w. verbs
    α. as their obj.: ὄν. ἔχειν Did., Gen. 29, 6 bear the name or as name, be named ὄν. ἔχει Ἀπολλύων Rv 9:11b (in this case the name Ἀ. stands independently in the nom.; B-D-F §143; Rob. 458). καλεῖν τὸ ὄν. τινος w. the name foll. in the acc. (after the Hb.; B-D-F §157, 2; Rob. 459) καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦν you are to name him Jesus Mt 1:21; Lk 1:31.—Mt 1:25. καλέσεις τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰωάννην Lk 1:13. καλέσουσιν τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἐμμανουήλ Mt 1:23 (Is 7:14). διδόναι GJs 6:2. Pass. w. the name in the nom. (cp. GrBar 6:10 Φοῖνιξ καλεῖται τὸ ὄν. μου) ἐκλήθη τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Ἰησοῦς Lk 2:21; cp. Rv 19:13. Also τὸ ὄν. τοῦ ἀστέρος λέγεται ὁ ῎ Αψινθος Rv 8:11.—ἐπιθεῖναι ὄν. τινι w. acc. of the name Mk 3:16f; cp. 12:8f; κληρονομεῖν ὄν. receive a name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2. κληροῦσθαι τὸ αὐτὸ ὄν. obtain the same name (s. κληρόω 2) MPol 6:2.—τὰ ὀν. ὑμῶν ἐγγέγραπται ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς Lk 10:20.—Rv 13:8; 17:8. ἐξαλείψω τὸ ὄν. αὐτῶν 1 Cl 53:3 (Dt 9:14); Rv 3:5a (perh. to be placed in 4 below); s. ἐξαλείφω.
    β. in another way (εἰ δέ τις ὀνόματι καλέσει but if anyone is so named Hippol., Ref. 6, 20, 2): ὸ̔ς καλεῖται τῷ ὀνόματι τούτῳ who is so named Lk 1:61. ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι καλούμενος Ζακχαῖος a man whose name was Zacchaeus 19:2. καλεῖν τι (i.e. παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματί τινος name someone after someone 1:59. Cp. IMg 10:1. This leads to
    ⓒ used w. prepositions: ἐξ ὀνόματος (Ctesias, Ind. p. 105 M.: Diod S 13, 15, 1; 37, 15, 2; Appian, Mithrid. 59, §243, Bell. Civ. 3, 21 §77; 4, 73 §310; PGM 4, 2973; Jos., Ant. 2, 275) by name, individually, one by one (so that no one is lost in the crowd) ἐξ ὀν. πάντας ζήτει IPol 4:2. ἀσπάζομαι πάντας ἐξ ὀνόματος 8:2. πάντες ἐξ ὀν. συνέρχεσθε (parallel to κατʼ ἄνδρα) IEph 20:2.—κατʼ ὄν. by name, individually (Diod S 16, 44, 2; Gen 25:13; EpArist 247; Jos., Bell. 7, 14) J 10:3 (New Docs 3, 77f; animals called individually by name: Ps.-Aristot., Mirabil. 118.—HAlmqvist, Plut. u. das NT ’46, 74). Esp. in greetings (BGU 27, 18 [II A.D.] ἀσπάζομαι πάντας τοὺς φιλοῦντάς σε κατʼ ὄν.; POxy 1070, 46; pap in Dssm., LO 160/1, ln. 14f [LAE 193, ln. 15, note 21]; New Docs 3, 77f) 3J 15; ISm 13:2b. ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατʼ ὄν. staffs, each one inscribed with the name of a tribe 1 Cl 43:2b.
    ⓓ used in combination with God and Jesus. On the significance of the Divine Name in history of religions s. FGiesebrecht, Die atl. Schätzung des Gottesnamens 1901; Bousset, Rel.3 309ff; ADieterich, Eine Mithrasliturgie 1903, 110ff; FConybeare, JQR 8, 1896; 9, 1897, esp. 9, 581ff; JBoehmer, Das bibl. ‘im Namen’ 1898, BFCT V 6, 1901, 49ff, Studierstube 2, 1904, 324ff; 388ff; 452ff; 516ff; 580ff; BJacob, Im Namen Gottes 1903;WHeitmüller, ‘Im Namen Jesu’ 1903; WBrandt, TT 25, 1891, 565ff; 26, 1892, 193ff; 38, 1904, 355ff; RHirzel, Der Name: ASG 36, 2, 1918; Schürer III4 409–11; HObbink, De magische betekenis van den naam inzonderheid in het oude Egypte 1925; OGrether, Name u. Wort Gottes im AT ’34; HHuffman, Name: 1148–52.—The belief in the efficacy of the name is extremely old; its origin goes back to the most ancient times and the most primitive forms of intellectual and religious life. It has exhibited an extraordinary vitality. The period of our lit. also sees—within as well as without the new community of believers—in the name someth. real, a piece of the very nature of the personality whom it designates, expressing the person’s qualities and powers. Accordingly, names, esp. holy names, are revered and used in customary practices and ritual (σέβεσθαι θεῶν ὀνόματα Theoph. Ant., 1, 9 [p. 76, 7]), including magic. In Israelite tradition the greatest reverence was paid to the holy name of God and to its numerous paraphrases or substitutes; the names of angels and patriarchs occupied a secondary place. The syncretistic practices of the period revered the names of gods, daemons, and heroes, or even magic words that made no sense at all, but had a mysterious sound. The Judeo-Christians revere and use the name of God and, of course, the name of Jesus. On magic in Jewish circles, s. Schürer III 342–79; for the NT period in general s. MSmith, Clement of Alexandria and a Secret Gospel of Mark ’73, 195–230.—The names of God and Jesus
    α. in combination w. attributes: διαφορώτερον ὄν. a more excellent name Hb 1:4=1 Cl 36:2 (διάφορος 2). ἅγιον τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ Lk 1:49 (cp. Ps 110:9; Lev 18:21; 22:2; PGM 3, 570; 627; 4, 1005; 3071; 5, 77; 13, 561 μέγα κ. ἅγιον). τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ 1 Cl 64; τὸ μέγα καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hv 4, 1, 3; 4, 2, 4 (on ἔνδοξον ὄν., cp. EPeterson, Εἷ θεός 1926, 282.—ὄν. μέγα κ. ἅγ. κ. ἔνδ.: PGM 13, 183f; 504f). τὸ μέγα καὶ θαυμαστὸν καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. Hs 9, 18, 5; τὸ πανάγιον καὶ ἔνδοξον ὄν. 1 Cl 58:1a; τοῦ παντοκράτορος καὶ ἐνδόξου ὄν. Hv 3, 3, 5; τὸ πανάρετον ὄν. 1 Cl 45:7; τῷ παντοκράτορι καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι 60:4; τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. 58:1b. τὸ ὄν. μου θαυμαστὸν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι D 14:3 (cp. Mal 1:14). The words ὄν. θεοπρεπέστατον IMg 1:2 are difficult to interpret (s. Hdb. ad loc.; θεοπρεπής b).
    β. in combination w. verbs: ἁγιάζειν τὸ ὄν. Mt 6:9 (AFridrichsen, Helligt vorde dit naun: DTT 8, 1917, 1–16). Lk 11:2; D 8:2 (ἁγιάζω 3). βλασφημεῖν (q.v. bγ) τὸ ὄν. Rv 13:6; 16:9; pass. βλασφημεῖται τὸ ὄν. (Is 52:5) Ro 2:24; 2 Cl 13:1f, 4; ITr 8:2. βλασφημίας ἐπιφέρεσθαι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου bring blasphemy upon the name of the Lord 1 Cl 47:7. πφοσέθηκαν κατὰ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου βλασφημίαν Hs 6, 2, 3; βεβηλοῦν τὸ ὄν. 8, 6, 2 (s. βεβηλόω). ἀπαγγελῶ τὸ ὄν. τ. ἀδελφοῖς μου Hb 2:12 (cp. Ps 21:23). ὅπως διαγγελῇ τὸ ὄν. μου ἐν πάσῃ τῇ γῇ Ro 9:17 (Ex 9:16). δοξάζειν τὸ ὄν. (σου, τοῦ κυρίου, τοῦ θεοῦ etc.) Rv 15:4; 1 Cl 43:6; IPhld 10:1; Hv 2, 1, 2; 3, 4, 3; 4, 1, 3; Hs 9, 18, 5 (s. δοξάζω 1; cp. GJs 7:2; 12:1[w. ref. to name of Mary]). ὅπως ἐνδοξασθῇ τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ 2 Th 1:12. ἐλπίζειν τῷ ὀν. Mt 12:21 (vv.ll. ἐν or ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.; the pass. on which it is based, Is 42:4, has ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν.). ἐπικαλεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου (as PsSol 6:1) or αὐτοῦ, σου etc. (w. ref. to God or Christ) call on the name of the Lord Ac 2:21 (Jo 3:5); 9:14, 21; 22:16; Ro 10:13 (Jo 3:5); 1 Cor 1:2. ψυχὴ ἐπικεκλημένη τὸ μεγαλοπρεπὲς καὶ ἅγιον ὄν. αὐτοῦ a person who calls upon his exalted and holy name 1 Cl 64.—Pass. πάντα τὰ ἔθνη ἐφʼ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄν. μου ἐπʼ αὐτούς Ac 15:17 (Am 9:12). τὸ καλὸν ὄν. τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐφʼ ὑμᾶς Js 2:7 (on καλὸν ὄν. cp. Sb 343, 9 and the Pompeian graffito in Dssm., LO 237 [LAE 276]). πάντες οἱ ἐπικαλούμενοι τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ all those who are called by (the Lord’s) name Hs 9, 14, 3; cp. οἱ κεκλημένοι τῷ ὀν. κυρίου those who are called by the name of the Lord 8, 1, 1. ἐπαισχύνεσθαι τὸ ὄν. κυρίου τὸ ἐπικληθὲν ἐπʼ αὐτούς be ashamed of the name that is named over them 8, 6, 4. ὁμολογεῖν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ praise his name Hb 13:15 (cp. PsSol 15:2 ἐξομολογήσασθαι τῷ ὀνόματι σου). ὀνομάζειν τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 2 Ti 2:19 (Is 26:13). ψάλλειν τῷ ὀν. σου Ro 15:9 (Ps 17:50). οὐ μὴ λάβῃς ἐπὶ ματαίῳ τὸ ὄν. κυρίου 19:5 (Ex 20:7; Dt 5:11).—Although in the preceding examples the name is oft. practically inseparable fr. the being that bears it, this is perh. even more true of the foll. cases, in which the name appears almost as the representation of the Godhead, as a tangible manifestation of the divine nature (Quint. Smyrn. 9, 465 Polidarius, when healing, calls on οὔνομα πατρὸς ἑοῖο ‘the name of his father’ [Asclepius]; τοσοῦτον … δύναται τὸ ὄ. τοῦ Ἰησοῦ κατὰ τῶν δαιμόνων Orig., C. Cels. 1, 56, 11; Dt 18:7; 3 Km 8:16; Ps 68:37; Zech 13:2 ἐξολεθρεύσω τὰ ὀν. τῶν εἰδώλων; Zeph 1:4; PsSol 7:6; Just., D. 121, 3 ὑποτάσσεσθαι αὐτοῦ ὀν.): the ‘name’ of God is ἀρχέγονον πάσης κτίσεως 1 Cl 59:3. Sim. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ μέγα ἐστὶ καὶ τὸν κόσμον ὅλον βαστάζει Hs 9, 14, 5. λατρεύειν τῷ παναρέτῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ worship the most excellent name (of the Most High) 1 Cl 45:7. ὑπακούειν τῷ παναγίῳ καὶ ἐνδόξῳ ὀν. αὐτοῦ be obedient to his most holy and glorious name 58:1a. ὑπήκοον γενέσθαι τῷ παντοκρατορικῷ καὶ παναρέτῳ ὀν. 60:4. κηρύσσειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ Hs 9, 16, 5. ἐπιγινώσκειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ 9, 16, 7. φοβεῖσθαι τὸ ὄν. σου Rv 11:18. φανεροῦν τινι τὸ ὄν. σου J 17:6. γνωρίζειν τινὶ τὸ ὄν. σου vs. 26. πιστεύειν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ believe in the name of (God’s) son 1J 3:23. Also πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. (s. γב below and s. πιστεύω 2aβ).—Of the name borne by followers of Jesus Christ (cp. Theoph. Ant. 1, 1 [p. 58, 13]): κρατεῖς τὸ ὄν. μου you cling to my name Rv 2:13. The same mng. also holds for the expressions: λαμβάνειν τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 12, 4; 8; 9, 13, 2a; 7. τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄν. μου ἐνώπιον ἐθνῶν to bear my name before (the) Gentiles Ac 9:15. τὸ ὄν. ἡδέως βαστάζειν bear the name gladly Hs 8, 10, 3; cp. 9, 28, 5b. τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ φορεῖν 9, 13, 3; 9, 14, 5f; 9, 15, 2; cp. 9, 13, 2b. Christians receive this name at their baptism: πρὶν φορέσαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον τὸ ὄν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ νεκρός ἐστιν before a person bears the name of God’s Son (which is given the candidate at baptism), he is dead 9, 16, 3. Of dissemblers and false teachers ὄν. μὲν ἔχουσιν, ἀπὸ δὲ τῆς πίστεως κενοί εἰσιν they have the (Christian) name, but are devoid of faith 9, 19, 2. Of Christians in appearance only ἐν ὑποκρίσει φέροντες τὸ ὄν. τοῦ κυρίου who bear the Lord’s name in pretense Pol 6:3. δόλῳ πονηρῷ τὸ ὄν. περιφέρειν carry the name about in wicked deceit (evidently of wandering preachers) IEph 7:1. τὸ ὄν. ἐπαισχύνονται τοῦ κυρίου αὐτῶν they are ashamed of their Lord’s name Hs 9, 21, 3. More fully: ἐπαισχύνονται τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ φορεῖν 9, 14, 6.
    γ. used w. prepositions
    א. w. διά and the gen. διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου πιστεύειν PtK 3 p. 15 ln. 12; σωθῆναι διὰ τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ἐνδόξου ὀν. be saved through the great and glorious name Hv 4, 2, 4. εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ θεοῦ εἰσελθεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ (τοῦ θεοῦ) Hs 9, 12, 5. ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ Ac 10:43 (cp. Just., D. 11, 4 al.). σημεῖα … γίνεσθαι διὰ τοῦ ὀν. … Ἰησοῦ by the power of the name 4:30. Differently παρακαλεῖν τινα διὰ τοῦ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου appeal to someone by the name (= while calling on the name) of the Lord 1 Cor 1:10.—W. διά and the acc. μισούμενοι … διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου hated on account of my name (i.e., because you bear it) Mt 10:22; 24:9; Mk 13:13; Lk 21:17 (Just., A I, 4, 2 al.). ποιεῖν τι εἴς τινα διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου J 15:21. ἀφέωνται ὑμῖν αἱ ἁμαρτίαι διὰ τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ your sins are forgiven on account of (Jesus’) name 1J 2:12. βαστάζειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. μου bear (hardship) for my name’s sake Rv 2:3 (s. βαστάζω 2bβ). πάσχειν διὰ τὸ ὄν. (also w. a gen. like αὐτοῦ) Pol 8:2; Hv 3, 2, 1b; Hs 9, 28, 3.
    ב. w. εἰς: somet. evidently as rendering of rabb. לְשֵׁם with regard to, in thinking of δέχεσθαί τινα εἰς ὄν. Ἰ. Χρ. receive someone in deference to Jesus Christ IRo 9:3. δύο ἢ τρεῖς συνηγμένοι εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄν. two or three gathered and thinking of me, i.e., so that I am the reason for their assembling Mt 18:20; but here the other mng. (s. ג below) has had some influence: ‘while naming’ or ‘calling on my name’. τῆς ἀγάπης ἧς ἐνεδείξασθε εἰς τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ (i.e. θεοῦ) Hb 6:10 is either the love that you have shown with regard to him, i.e. for his sake, or we have here the frequently attested formula of Hellenistic legal and commercial language (s. Mayser II/2 p. 415; Dssm. B 143ff, NB 25, LO 97f [BS 146f; 197; LAE 121]; Heitmüller, op. cit. 100ff; FPreisigke, Girowesen im griech. Ägypt. 1910, 149ff. On the LXX s. Heitmüller 110f; JPsichari, Essai sur le Grec de la Septante 1908, 202f): εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος to the name=to the account (over which the name stands). Then the deeds of love, although shown to humans, are dedicated to God.—The concept of dedication is also highly significant, in all probability, for the understanding of the expr. βαπτίζειν εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τινος. Through baptism εἰς (τὸ) ὄν. τ. those who are baptized become the possession of and come under the dedicated protection of the one whose name they bear. An additional factor, to a degree, may be the sense of εἰς τὸ ὄν.=‘with mention of the name’ (cp. Herodian 2, 2, 10; 2, 13, 2 ὀμνύναι εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος; Cyranides p. 57, 1 εἰς ὄν. τινος; 60, 18=εἰς τὸ ὄν. τ.; 62, 13. Another ex. in Heitmüller 107): Mt 28:19; Ac 8:16; 19:5; D 7:1, (3); 9:5; Hv 3, 7, 3; cp. 1 Cor 1:13, 15. S. βαπτίζω 2c and Silva New, Beginn. I/5, ’33, 121–40.—πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄν. τινος believe in the name of someone i.e. have confidence that the person’s name (rather in the sense of a title, cp. Phil 2:9) is rightfully borne and encodes what the person really is J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18; 1J 5:13.
    ג. with ἐν: ἐν ὀνόματι of God or Jesus means in the great majority of cases with mention of the name, while naming or calling on the name (PsSol 11:8; JosAs 9:1; Just., D. 35, 2 al.; no corresponding use has been found in gener. Gk. lit.; but cp. ἐν ὀν. τοῦ μεγάλου καὶ ὑψίστου θεοῦ Hippol., Ref. 9, 15, 6.—Heitmüller p. 13ff, esp. 44; 49). In many pass. it seems to be a formula. ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Mk 9:38; 16:17; Lk 9:49. τὰ δαιμόνια ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. σου the demons are subject to us at the mention of your name 10:17. ποιεῖν τι ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ac 4:7; cp. Col 3:17. Perh. J 10:25 (but s. below). ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ … οὗτος παρέστηκεν ὑγιής Ac 4:10. ὄν. … ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς vs. 12. παραγγέλλω σοι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. 16:18; cp. 2 Th 3:6; IPol 5:1. σοὶ λέγω ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ac 14:10 D. Peter, in performing a healing, says ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. περιπάτει 3:6 (s. Heitmüller 60). The elders are to anoint the sick w. oil ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου while calling on the name of the Lord Js 5:14.—Of prophets λαλεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. κυρίου 5:10. παρρησιάζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ speak out boldly in proclaiming the name of Jesus Ac 9:27f. βαπτίζεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. be baptized or have oneself baptized while naming the name of Jesus Christ Ac 2:38 v.l.; 10:48. At a baptism ἐν ὀν. χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ AcPl Ha 3, 32. αἰτεῖν τὸν πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (=Ἰησοῦ) ask the Father, using my name J 15:16; cp. 14:13, 14; 16:24, 26. W. the latter pass. belongs vs. 23 (ὁ πατὴρ) δώσει ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου (the Father) will give you, when you mention my name. τὸ πνεῦμα ὸ̔ πέμψει ὁ πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀν. μου the Spirit, whom the Father will send when my name is used 14:26. To thank God ἐν ὀν. Ἰησοῦ Χρ. while naming the name of Jesus Christ Eph 5:20. ἵνα ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰησοῦ πᾶν γόνυ κάμψῃ that when the name of Jesus is mentioned every knee should bow Phil 2:10. χαίρετε, υἱοί, ἐν ὀν. κυρίου greetings, my sons, as we call on the Lord’s name 1:1. ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου whoever comes, naming the Lord’s name (in order thereby to give evidence of being a Christian) D 12:1. ἀσπάζεσθαι ἐν ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. greet, while naming the name of J. Chr. w. acc. of pers. or thing greeted IRo ins; ISm 12:2. Receive a congregation ἐν ὀν. θεοῦ IEph 1:3. συναχθῆναι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. meet and call on the name of the Lord Jesus=as a Christian congregation 1 Cor 5:4. μόνον ἐν τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. only (it is to be) while calling on the name of J. Chr. ISm 4:2.—Not far removed fr. these are the places where we render ἐν τῷ ὀν. with through or by the name (s. ἐν 4c); the effect brought about by the name is caused by its utterance ἀπελούσασθε, ἡγιάσθητε, ἐδικαιώθητε ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ κυρίου Ἰ. Χρ. 1 Cor 6:11. ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ (=Ἰησοῦ) J 20:31. τηρεῖν τινα ἐν τῷ ὀν. (θεοῦ) 17:11f.—ἐν τῷ ὀν. at the command (of), commissioned by ἔργα ποιεῖν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός J 10:25 (but s. above). ἔρχεσθαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. τοῦ πατρός 5:43a; in contrast ἔρχ. ἐν τῷ ὀν. τῷ ἰδίῳ vs. 43b. εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀν. κυρίου 12:13 (Ps 117:26). The Ps-passage prob. has the same sense (despite Heitmüller 53f) in Mt 21:9; 23:39; Mk 11:9; Lk 13:35; 19:38.—OMerlier, Ὄνομα et ἐν ὀνόματι dans le quatr. Év.: RevÉtGr 47, ’34, 180–204; RBratcher, BT 14, ’63, 72–80.
    ד. w. ἕνεκα (and the other forms of this word; s. ἕνεκα 1): of persecutions for one’s Christian faith ἀπάγεσθαι ἐπὶ βασιλεῖς ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. μου Lk 21:12. πάσχειν or ὑποφέρειν εἵνεκα τοῦ ὀνόματος Hv 3, 1, 9; 3, 2, 1; Hs 9, 28, 5. ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. (τοῦ) κυρίου v 3, 5, 2; Hs 9, 28, 6. ἀφιέναι οἰκίας … ἕνεκεν τοῦ ἐμοῦ ὀν. for my name’s sake Mt 19:29. ἔκτισας τὰ πάντα ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀν. σου you created all things for your name’s sake, i.e. that God’s name might be praised for the benefits which the works of creation bring to humankind D 10:3.
    ה. w. ἐπί and the dat.: ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τινος when someone’s name is mentioned or called upon, or mentioning someone’s name (LXX; En 10:2; Just., D. 39, 6; Ath. 23, 1; s. Heitmüller 19ff; 43ff; s. also 47ff; 52ff; 87ff) in the NT only of the name of Jesus, and only in the synoptics and Ac. ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου they will come using my name Mt 24:5; Mk 13:6; Lk 21:8. κηρύσσειν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. αὐτοῦ μετάνοιαν 24:47. λαλεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ to speak using this name Ac 4:17; 5:40. διδάσκειν 4:18; 5:28. ποιεῖν δύναμιν ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου Mk 9:39. ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. σου ἐκβάλλειν δαιμόνια Lk 9:49 v.l. ἐπὶ τῷ σῷ ὀν. τὰς θεραπείας ἐπετέλουν GJs 20:2 (codd.). Of the (spiritual) temple of God: οἰκοδομηθήσεται ναὸς θεοῦ ἐνδόξως ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. κυρίου the temple of God will be gloriously built with the use of the Lord’s name 16:6f, 8 (quot. of uncertain orig.). βαπτίζεσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. Ἰ. Χρ. Ac 2:38. Baptism is also referred to in καλεῖσθαι ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ θεοῦ receive a name when the name of God’s son is named Hs 9, 17, 4. The words δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου can also be classed here receive (a child) when my name is confessed, when I am called upon Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (s. Heitmüller 64); but s. also 3 below.—ἐπί w. acc.: πεποιθέναι ἐπὶ τὸ ὁσιώτατον τῆς μεγαλωσύνης αὐτοῦ ὄν. have confidence in (the Lord’s) most sacred and majestic name 1 Cl 58:1b; ἐλπίζειν ἐπὶ τὸ ὄν. hope in the name (of the Lord) 16:8b.
    ו. w. περί and the gen.: εὐαγγελίζεσθαι περὶ τοῦ ὀν. Ἰ. Χ. bring the good news about the name of J. Chr. Ac 8:12.—(W. acc.: ἔχομεν δέος τὸ ὄ. τοῦ θεοῦ Orig., C. Cels. 4, 48, 34).
    ז. w. πρός and acc.: πρὸς τὸ ὄν. Ἰησοῦ … πολλὰ ἐναντία πρᾶξαι do many things in opposing the name of Jesus Ac 26:9.
    ח. w. ὑπέρ and gen.: ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. (Ἰησοῦ) ἀτιμασθῆναι Ac 5:41. πάσχειν 9:16; Hs 9, 28, 2. Cp. Ac 15:26; 21:13. The activity of the apostles takes place ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀν. αὐτοῦ to the honor of (Jesus’) name Ro 1:5. Cp. 3J 7. Of thankful praying at the Lord’s Supper εὐχαριστοῦμεν σοι … ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἁγίου ὀν. σου, οὗ κατεσκήνωσας ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν we thank you … for your holy name, which you caused to dwell in our hearts D 10:2.
    δ. ὄν. w. ref. to God or Christ not infreq. stands quite alone, simply the Name: Ac 5:41; Phil 2:9 (cp. Diod S 3, 61, 6); 3J 7; 2 Cl 13:1, 4; IEph 3:1; 7:1; IPhld 10:1; Hv 3, 2, 1; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 13, 2; 9, 28, 3; 5.
    ② a person (Phalaris, Ep. 128; POxy 1188, 8 [13 A.D.]; BGU 113, 11; Jos., Ant. 14, 22; other exx. in Dssm., NB 24f [BS 196f]; LXX) τὸ ποθητόν μοι ὄν. my dear friend: Alce ISm 13:2; IPol 8:3; Crocus IRo 10:1. Pl. (PThéad 41, 10; PSI 27, 22; Num 1:18 al.) people Ac 1:15; Rv 3:4. ὀνόματα ἀνθρώπων 11:13 (cp. Ael. Aristid. 50, 72 K.=26 p. 523 D.: ὀνόματα δέκα ἀνδρῶν). This is prob. the place for περὶ λόγου καὶ ὀνομάτων καὶ νόμου about teaching and persons and (the) law Ac 18:15.
    ③ the classification under which one belongs, noted by a name or category, title, category (cp. Cass. Dio 38, 44; 42, 24 καὶ ὅτι πολλῷ πλείω ἔν τε τῷ σχήματι καὶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ τῆς στρατηγίας ὢν καταπράξειν ἤλπιζε=he hoped to effect much more by taking advantage of his praetorial apparel and title; ins: Sb 7541, 5 [II A.D.] Νύμφη ὄνομʼ ἐστί σοι; POxy 37 I, 17 [49 A.D.] βούλεται ὀνόματι ἐλευθέρου τὸ σωμάτιον ἀπενέγκασθαι=she claims to have carried off the infant on the basis of its being free-born; Jos., Ant. 12, 154 φερνῆς ὀνόματι; 11, 40; Just., A II, 6, 4 καὶ ἀνθρώπου καὶ σωτῆρος ὄνομα. Other exx. in Heitmüller 50); the possibility of understanding ὄν. as category made it easier for Greeks to take over rabb. לְשֵׁם (s. 1dγב above) in the sense with regard to a particular characteristic, then simply with regard to, for the sake of ὁ δεχόμενος προφήτην εἰς ὄν. προφήτου whoever receives a prophet within the category ‘prophet’, i.e. because he is a prophet, as a prophet Mt 10:41a; cp. vss. 41b, 42.—ὸ̔ς ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ἐν ὀνόματι, ὄτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε whoever gives you a drink under the category that you belong to Christ, i.e. in your capacity as a follower of Christ Mk 9:41. εἰ ὀνειδίζεσθε ἐν ὀν. Χριστοῦ if you are reviled for the sake of Christ 1 Pt 4:14. δοξαζέτω τὸν θεὸν ἐν τῷ ὀν. τούτῳ let the person praise God in this capacity (=ὡς Χριστιανός) vs. 16. δέδεμαι ἐν τῷ ὀν. I am imprisoned for the sake of the Name IEph 3:1.—δέχεσθαι (παιδίον) ἐπὶ τῷ ὀν. μου for my (name’s) sake Mt 18:5; Mk 9:37; Lk 9:48 (cp. Heitmüller 113. But s. 1dγה above).
    ④ recognition accorded a person on the basis of performance, (well-known) name, reputation, fame (Hom. et al.; 1 Ch 14:17; 1 Macc 8:12) φανερὸν ἐγένετο τὸ ὄν. αὐτοῦ his fame was widespread Mk 6:14. ὄν. ἔχειν (Pla., Apol. 38c, Ep. 2, 312c) w. ὅτι foll. have the reputation of Rv 3:1 perh. also 3:5 (s. 1bα; JFuller, JETS 26, ’83, 297–306).
    ⑤ name in terms of office held, office (POxy 58, 6) στασιαζουσῶν τ. φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη when the tribes were quarreling as to which one of them was to be adorned with that glorious office 1 Cl 43:2. τὸ ὄν. τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς the office of supervision 44:1.—B. 1263f. OEANE IV 91–96 on Mesopotamian practices. Schmidt, Syn. I 113–24. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ὄνομα

  • 7 apud

    ăpŭd ( apud down to the time of Caesar, Corp. Inscr. I. 30; I. 196; and after 45 B. C. both apud, Inscr. Orell. 206; 818, and aput, ib. 206; 15; 34; another form of apud was apor, Paul. ex Fest. p. 26 Mull. apud, Ritschl, Rib. in Trag. et Com. Rel., Mull. in Lucil., and Dietsch in Sall.; aput, Lachm., Fleck. in Plaut.; both apud and aput, Mull. in Cat. and Rib. in Verg.) [Corssen once regarded apud as connected with apisci, as juxta with jungo, Ausspr. I. p. 335, 1st ed., but afterwards, ib. 2d ed. I. p. 197, he adopted Pott's view, that it was comp. of Sanscr. api, = to, toward, near (Gr. epi), and ad, old form ar, which view the form apor favors, and thus its strict meaning would be on to, unto; v. infra, IV.]; prep. gov. acc., with, at, by, near (regularly with words denoting rest, and primarily of persons, while ad properly designates only direction, motion, extension, etc., and is chiefly used of places; the diff. between apud and penes is given in Paul. ex Fest. p. 22 Mull.: apud et penes in hoc differunt, quod alterum personam cum loco significat, alterum personam et dominium ac potestatem; v. penes, and cf. Nep. Them. 7, 2: ad ephoros Lacedaemoniorum accessit, penes quos summum imperium erat, atque apud eos (v. infra, I. B. 2. a.) contendit, etc.; and for the difference between ad and apud, cf. Lucil. 9, 58 sq. Mull.: apud se longe alid est, neque idem valet ad se: Intro nos vocat ad sese, tenet intus apud se; syn.: ad, prope, coram, inter, in with abl.; rare in early Lat.; very freq. in Plaut., less freq. in Ter., seven times in Verg., five times in Juv., three times in Catull., twice in Ov, and once in Hor. and Prop.; never in Tib. or Pers.; very freq. in Cic., the historians, and the Vulg.).
    I.
    A.. In designating nearness in respect of persons, with, near: apud ipsum adstas, Att. ap. Non. p. 522, 25:

    adsum apud te, genitor,

    id. ib. p. 522, 32:

    alteram (partem) apud me adponito,

    Plaut. Trin. 4, 3, 60:

    nunc hic apud te servio,

    id. Capt. 2, 2, 62:

    scriptorum non magnast copia apud me,

    Cat. 68, 33 Mull.:

    mane apud me,

    Vulg. Gen. 29, 19:

    Advocatum habemus apud Patrem,

    ib. 1 Joan. 2, 1:

    cum in lecto Crassus esset et apud eum Sulpicius sederet,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 3, 12; so id. Pis. 26, and id. Rep. 3, 28.—
    B.
    Esp.
    1.
    a.. With a pron. or subst., apud me, te, se, aliquem, etc., with me, in my house, etc., in one's house, at the house of a person; Fr. chez moi, chez vous, chez soi, etc.:

    Quis heri apud te? Naev., Com. Rel. p. 9 Rib.: dico eum esse apud me,

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 2, 15; 4, 2, 73:

    hic apud me hortum confodere jussi,

    id. Aul. 2, 2, 66:

    si commodumst, apud me, sis, volo,

    Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 110:

    condixerant cenam apud me, Turp., Com. Rel. p. 108 Rib.: quid nunc virgo? Nempe apud test?

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 159:

    Quid sibi volunt homines isti apud te?

    Vulg. Num. 22, 9; ib. Matt. 26, 18:

    cenabis bene apud me,

    Cat. 13, 1:

    apud me habitavit,

    Cic. Clu. 33; id. Verr. 4, 111; 5, 77:

    apud te cenavit,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 58; id. Verr. 4, 49; id. Cael. 26; id. Deiot. 32:

    in curia posita potius quam rure apud te, Titin., Com. Rel. p. 142 Rib.: mane apud me etiam hodie,

    Vulg. Jud. 19, 9:

    tenet intus apud se,

    Lucil. 9, 59 Mull.:

    Pompeius petiit, ut secum et apud se essem cotidie,

    Cic. Att. 5, 6:

    apud se fecit manere,

    Vulg. Jud. 19, 7; ib. Luc. 11, 37:

    de gladiis, quae apud ipsum erant deprehensa,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 10:

    Cum postridie apud eundem ventum exspectans manerem,

    id. Phil. 1, 8:

    mansit apud eum quattuor mensibus,

    Vulg. Jud. 19, 2; ib. Act. 28, 14:

    apud quem deversatus es,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 37: apud nympham Calypsonem, Liv. And. ap. Prisc. p. 685 (cf. Hom. Od. 4, 557: Numphês en megaroisi Kalupsous):

    habitasti apud Heium Messanae,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 18; id. Cael. 51:

    Fuisti apud Laecam illa nocte,

    id. Cat. 1, 4, 9; id. de Or. 1, 22, 104; id. Att. 1, 8:

    apud Ostorium Scapulam epulatur,

    Tac. A. 14, 48:

    apud Cornelium Primum juxta Velabrum delituit,

    id. H. 3, 74; 1, 14:

    Factum est, ut moraretur apud Simonem quendam,

    Vulg. Act. 9, 43:

    invenient hominem apud sororem tuam occultantem se,

    Cic. Dom. 83:

    qui apud te esset eductus,

    id. Quinct. 69:

    apud quem erat educatus,

    id. Lael. 20, 75:

    cum alter ejus filius apud matrem educaretur,

    id. Clu. 27:

    disciplina C. Cassii, apud quem educatus erat,

    Tac. A. 15, 52:

    se apud Q. Mucium jus civile didicisse,

    id. Or. 30:

    apud eosdem magistratus institutus,

    Suet. Calig. 24:

    servorum manus tamquam apud senem festinantes,

    Tac. H. 1, 7:

    in convivio apud regem,

    id. A. 2, 57: Bene vale;

    apud Orcum te videbo,

    in the abode of Orcus, Plaut. As. 3, 3, 16:

    sacrificasse apud deos, i. e. in templis deorum,

    Tac. A. 11, 27:

    frater apud Othonem militans,

    in the army of Otho, id. H. 2, 26; so,

    nec solum apud Caecinam (cognoscebatur id damnum composuisse),

    id. ib. 2, 27:

    quorum sint legati apud se,

    in his camp, Caes. B. G. 4, 8; cf.:

    Quos cum apud se in castris Ariovistus conspexisset,

    id. ib. 1, 47:

    dici hoc potest, Apud portitores eas (litteras) resignatas sibi,

    at the custom-house, Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 64; 3, 3, 80:

    Quantillum argenti mihi apud trapezitam siet,

    at the banker's, id. Capt. 1, 2, 90:

    duo genera materiarum apud rhetoras tractantur, i. e. in scholis rhetorum, as he says just before,

    Tac. Or. 35.—Apud me etc. is sometimes added to domi or in aedibus, or interchanges with domi: Me. Ubi namst, quaeso? Ch. Apud me domi, Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 21:

    a me insidias apud me domi positas esse dixerunt,

    Cic. Sest. 41:

    domi esse apud sese archipiratas dixit duos,

    id. Verr. 5, 73; so Vulg. Gen. 27, 15:

    quae (signa) cognovi apud istum in aedibus,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 50:

    esse illa signa domi suae, non esse apud Verrem,

    id. ib. 4, 16:

    nihil apud hanc lautum, pistor domi nullus,

    id. Pis. 67; id. Clu. 165.—Hence,
    b.
    Trop.: apud se esse, to be at home, i. e. to be in one's senses, be one's self, be sane (only in conversational lang.; most freq. in Ter.; cf. Gr. en heautôi einai, Ar. Vesp. 642; opp. vecors, amens esse, to be out of one's wits, beside one's self; so Gr. phrenôn exestanai, Eur. Or. 1021):

    Sumne ego apud me?

    Plaut. Mil. 4, 8, 36:

    Non sum apud me,

    Ter. Phorm. 1, 4, 26, and Afran., Com. Rel, p. 170 Rib.:

    Prae iracundia, Menedeme, non sum apud me,

    Ter. Heaut. 5, 1, 48:

    Vix sum apud me: ita animus commotust metu, spe, gaudio,

    id. And. 5, 4, 34:

    Num tibi videtur esse apud sese?

    id. Hec. 4, 4, 85 (quasi ob amorem meretricis insanus, Don.):

    proin tu fac, apud te ut sies,

    id. And. 2, 4, 5 (= ut praeparatus sis, Don.); Petr. 129.—
    2.
    In respect of persons, in whose presence or before whom any thing is done or takes place, esp. of discussions or debates in which the persons have the right of decision (Web. Uebungsch. p. 33), before, in the presence of, = coram, ad.
    a.
    Of civil or military affairs, before:

    cum res agatur apud praetorem populi Romani et apud severissimos judices,

    Cic. Arch. 3:

    apud eosdem judices reus est factus,

    id. Clu. 22, 59:

    vis de his judicari apud me?

    Vulg. Act. 25, 9:

    accusavit fratres suos apud patrem,

    ib. Gen. 37, 2; ib. 1 Macc. 7, 6; ib. Joan. 5, 45:

    hoc, quod nunc apud pontifices agis,

    Cic. Dom. 51; 117:

    istud ne apud eum quidem dictatorem quisquam egit isto modo,

    id. Lig. 12:

    qui hanc causam aliquotiens apud te egit,

    id. Quinct. 30; so id. Verr. 2, 100; 3, 114; id. Caecin. 69; id. Sest. 120:

    (populus Romanus) mihi potestatem apud se agendi dedit,

    id. Verr. 5, 173: Repulsior secunda collatione dixit Cato in ea, quae est contra Cornelium apud populum, Paul. ex Fest. p. 286 Mull.:

    tutoresne defendent apud istius modi praetorem?

    Cic. Verr. 1, 153; id. Clu. 126: apud te cum sim defensurus me, Vulg. Act. [p. 146] 26, 2:

    omnia apud praetores gererentur,

    Tac. Or. 38:

    causam nescio quam apud judicem defendebat,

    Cic. Clu. 74; so Tac. A. 3, 12; id. Or. 19:

    apud te defendit alium in ea voluntate non fuisse, in qua te,

    Cic. Lig. 6:

    apud judicem causam dicere,

    id. Quinct. 43; id. Verr. 1, 26; id. Sex. Rosc. 85:

    apud aliquem dicere,

    id. Lig. 6; id. Deiot. 4:

    verba apud senatum fecit,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 20:

    habita apud senatum oratione,

    Tac. A. 12, 25; 6, 8:

    haec apud patres disseruit,

    id. ib. 2, 43; 4, 2;

    4, 6: modeste apud vos socius populi Romani questus est,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 18:

    Quae est ergo apud Caesarem querella?

    id. Lig. 25:

    isne apud vos obtinebit causam, qui etc.,

    id. Caecin. 38:

    petita multa est apud eum praetorem,

    id. Verr. 1, 155:

    causam contra aliquem apud centumviros dicere,

    id. de Or. 2, 23, 98; Tac. Or. 38:

    numerus oratorum quot annis apud magistratus publice subscribitur,

    Cic. Verr. 3, 120:

    apud eorum quem qui manumitteretur,

    Liv. 41, 9: apud proconsules aliquem manumittere, Marcian. ap. Dig. 1, 162.—
    b.
    In extra judicial cases, before:

    apud hunc confessus es et genus etc.,

    Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 52:

    nullam causam dico, quin mihi Et parentum et libertatis apud te deliquio siet,

    id. ib. 3, 4, 93:

    apud erum qui (servos) vera loquitur,

    id. Am. 2, 1, 43:

    apud novercam querere,

    id. Ps. 1, 3, 80:

    ego apud parentem loquor,

    Cic. Lig. 30:

    plura fateri apud amicos,

    Tac. A. 14, 62:

    aliquid apud aliquem laudare,

    Cic. Att. 2, 25; Tac. A. 13, 46; so Vulg. Gen. 12, 15:

    aliquem apud aliquos vituperare,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 11:

    apud quem tu etiam nos criminari soles,

    id. Vatin. 29.—
    c.
    Of one's feelings, views, judgment, with, in the view or sight of, before.
    (α).
    With verbs:

    apud Tenedios sanctissimus deus habetur,

    Cic. Fl. 61; id. Verr. 1, 49:

    quod apud illos amplissimum sacerdotium putatur,

    id. ib. 2, 126;

    1, 69: si tutoris auctoritas apud te ponderis nihil habebat,

    id. ib. 2, 55; id. Planc. 4:

    apud judicem grave et sanctum esse ducetur,

    id. Q. Rosc. 6:

    Quae omnia apud nos partim infamia... ponuntur, Nep. praef. 5: justificatur apud Deum,

    Vulg. Gal. 3, 11:

    haec apud illos barbatos ridicula videbantur,

    Cic. Mur. 26; id. Dom. 101:

    unus dies apud Dominum (est) sicut mille anni, et mille anni sicut dies unus,

    Vulg. 2 Pet. 3, 8.—
    (β).
    With adjj.:

    fuisti apud pontifices superior,

    Cic. Dom. 4:

    qui honos est apud Syracusanos amplissimus,

    id. Verr. 4, 137; id. Font. 36:

    quam clara (expugnatio) apud omnes,

    id. Verr. 1, 50; 2, 50:

    Satis clarus est apud timentem quisquis timetur,

    Tac. H. 2, 76; id. Or. 7:

    hoc est apud Graecos prope gloriosius quam Romae triumphasse,

    Cic. Fl. 31; Tac. H. 5, 17:

    quod aeque apud bonos miserum est,

    id. ib. 1, 29:

    quae justa sunt apud nos,

    Vulg. 1 Macc. 11, 33; ib. Rom. 2, 13:

    tunc eritis inculpabiles apud Dominum,

    ib. Num. 32, 22:

    si is pretio apud istum idoneus esset,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 121.—
    (γ).
    With substt.:

    est tanta apud eos ejus fani religio atque antiquitas, ut etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 46:

    tanta nominis Romani dignitas est apud omnes nationes, ut etc.,

    id. ib. 5, 150:

    qua (hic) apud omnes Siculos dignitate atque existimatione sit,

    id. ib. 2, 111:

    Dymnus modicae apud regem auctoritatis et gratiae,

    Curt. 6, 72:

    abominatio est uterque apud Deum,

    Vulg. Prov. 17, 15.—Apud animum, apud animum meum, etc. sometimes stand for mihi, mecum, etc., or simply animo: Ea tute tibi subice et apud animum propone, before your mind, before you, Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5:

    ipsi primum statuerint apud animos, quid vellent,

    Liv. 6, 39, 11:

    Sic apud animum meum statuo,

    Sall. de Ord. Rep. 2:

    sic statuere apud animum meum possum,

    Liv. 34, 2, 4.—So with pers. pron. in Vulg. after the Greek: haec apud se (pros heauton) oravit, within himself, to himself, Luc. 18, 11: Sciens apud semet ipsum (en heautôi), in himself, Joan. 6, 62: statui hoc ipsum apud me (emautôi), ne etc., with myself, 2 Cor. 2, 1; so, hoc cogitet apud se (eph heautou), ib. 10, 7.—
    d.
    And simply before, in the presence of:

    id apud vos proloquar,

    Plaut. Capt. prol. 6:

    nemo est meorum amicorum, apud quem expromere omnia mea occulta audeam,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 3, 14:

    se jactant apud eos, quos inviti vident,

    Cic. Fl. 61:

    licet mihi, Marce fili, apud te gloriari, ad quem etc.,

    id. Off. 1, 22, 78: de vobis glorior apud Macedones, Vulg. 2 Cor. 9, 2:

    plus quam apud vos commemorari velitis,

    Cic. Caecin. 77:

    non apud indoctos loquor,

    id. Pis. 68:

    ostendit, quae quisque de eo apud se dixerit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 19:

    quid apud magnum loquerentur Achillem,

    Ov. M. 12, 163:

    neque raro neque apud paucos talia jaciebat,

    Tac. A. 4, 7:

    loqui de se apud aliquem,

    Cic. Att. 1, 3:

    mentiri apud aliquem,

    Plaut. Poen. 1, 1, 24:

    apud aliquem profiteri,

    Curt. 7, 7, 24:

    Non est nobis haec oratio habenda apud imperitam multitudinem,

    Cic. Mur. 61:

    Caesar apud milites contionatur,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 7:

    gratias agere alicui apud aliquem,

    Cic. Sest. 4; so Tac. A. 15, 22:

    si quid (in me) auctoritatis est, apud eos utar, qui etc.,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2; so id. Lig. 16, and id. Red. in Sen. 24:

    Quae fundebat apud Samson lacrimas,

    Vulg. Jud. 14, 16.—
    3.
    Of a person with whom, in whose case something is, exists, is done, with, in the case of, often = in with abl.:

    quom apud te parum stet fides,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 5, 62:

    Et bene apud memores veteris stat gratia facti,

    Verg. A. 4, 539:

    At fides mihi apud hunc est,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 3, 10: De. Quid est? Ch. Itan parvam mihi fidem esse apud te? id. Phorm. 5, 3, 27:

    ut apud me praemium esse positum pietati scias,

    id. Hec. 4, 2, 8:

    alioqui mercedem non habebitis apud Patrem vestrum,

    Vulg. Matt. 6, 1:

    illa res quantam declarat ejusdem hominis apud hostes populi Romani auctoritatem,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 46:

    (eum) Aeduorum auctoritatem apud omnes Belgas amplificaturum,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 14:

    si M. Petrei non summa auctoritas apud milites exstitisset,

    Cic. Sest. 12:

    Pompei auctoritas apud omnes tanta est. quanta etc.,

    id. Fl. 14; id. Phil. 13, 7:

    ecquid auctoritatis apud vos socii populi Romani habere debeant,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 17; so id. Verr. 2, 14; id. Mur 38:

    (servi) apud eum sunt in honore et pretio,

    id. Sex. Rosc. 77; id. Verr. 5, 157; id. Cat. 3, 2:

    videmus quanta sit in invidia quantoque in odio apud quosdam virtus et industria,

    id. Verr. 5, 181:

    quo majore apud vos odio esse debet quam etc.,

    id. ib. 1, 42:

    domi splendor, apud exteras nationes nomen et gratia,

    id. Clu. 154; id. Mur. 38:

    Dumnorigem, magna apud plebem gratia,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18:

    tanti ejus apud se gratiam esse ostendit, uti etc.,

    id. ib. 1, 20:

    certe apud te et hos, qui tibi adsunt, veritas valebit,

    Cic. Quinct. 5; id. Div. in Caecil. 17; id. Lig. 30; id. Marcell. 14; id. Mil. 34:

    utrum apud eos pudor atque officium aut timor valeret,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40:

    apud quem ut multum gratia valeret,

    Nep. Con. 2, 1:

    video apud te causas valere plus quam preces,

    Cic. Lig. 31; so id. Lael. 4, 13, and Tac. H. 3, 36:

    quod apud vos plurimum debebit valere,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 11; so Caes. B. G. 1, 17, and Tac. H. 4, 73:

    qui tantum auctoritate apud suos cives potuit, ut etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 113:

    speravit sese apud tales viros aliquid posse ad etc.,

    id. Sex. Rosc. 141:

    (eum) apud finitimas civitates largiter posse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18:

    quae (pecunia) apud me contra fidem meam nihil potuisset,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 19:

    quae (memoria) plus apud eum possit quam salus civitatis,

    id. Phil. 5, 51; id. Verr. 3, 131:

    qui apud eum plurimum poterat,

    id. ib. 3, 130:

    qui apud me et amicitia et beneficiis et dignitate plurimum possunt,

    id. Sex. Rosc. 4; so Caes. B. G. 1, 9.—So very rarely with adjj.:

    faciles sunt preces apud eos, qui etc.,

    Cic. Har. Resp. 63:

    nihil me turpius apud homines fuisset,

    id. Att. 2, 19:

    apud quos miserum auxilium tolerabile miserius malum fecit,

    Cels. 3, 23.—
    4.
    Of persons, of inhabitants of cities or countries, among whom one is, or something is, is done or happens, among = inter:

    CONSOL. QVEI. FVIT. APVD. VOS., Epit. Scip. ap. Grotef. Gr. II. p. 296: homines apud nos noti, inter suos nobiles,

    Cic. Fl. 52:

    Ut vos hic, itidem ille apud vos meus servatur filius,

    Plaut. Capt. 2, 2, 11; 2, 2, 62:

    qui (colonus) perigrinatur apud vos,

    Vulg. Exod. 12, 49:

    qui regnabat apud vos,

    ib. 1 Macc. 12, 7; ib. Matt. 13, 56; ib. Luc. 9, 41:

    si iste apud eos quaestor non fuisset,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 4; 65:

    Apud eos fuisse regem Divitiacum,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 4; 2, 2:

    qui (praetores) apud illos a populo creantur,

    Cic. Fl. 44:

    apud quos consul fuerat,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 66; id. Verr. 2, 5; 4, 108:

    apud inferos illi antiqui supplicia impiis constituta esse voluerunt,

    id. Cat. 4, 8; id. Tusc. 1, 5, 10; so Vulg. Eccli. 14, 17: Sunt apud infernos tot milia formosarum, Prop. 3, 2, 63:

    fateri quae quis apud superos distulit in seram commissa piacula mortem,

    Verg. A. 6, 568;

    Vel. 2, 48, 2: studiis militaribus apud juventutem obsoletis,

    Cic. Font. 42:

    qui apud socios nominis Latini censi essent,

    Liv. 41, 9:

    qui apud gentes solus praestat, Naev., Com. Rel. p. 25 Rib.: quae sacra apud omnes gentes nationesque fiunt,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 109:

    id (simulacrum) apud Segestanos positum fuisse,

    id. ib. 4, 80:

    si apud Athenienses non deerant qui rem publicam defenderent,

    id. Sest. 141, and Nep. Milt. 6, 2:

    ille est magistratus apud Siculos, qui etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 131:

    si tu apud Persas deprehensus etc.,

    id. ib. 5, 166:

    Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit Orgetorix,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 2:

    apud omnes Graecos hic mos est, ut etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 158, and id. Fragm. B. 7, 18 B. and K.:

    quod apud Germanos ea consuetudo esset, ut etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 50:

    aliis Germanorum populis usurpatum raro apud Chattos in consensum vertit,

    Tac. G. 31:

    Cui (mihi) neque apud Danaos usquam locus (est),

    Verg. A. 2, 71:

    apud Nahanarvalos antiquae religionis lucus ostenditur,

    Tac. G. 43; 32; 38; 44; id. H. 4, 56; 4, 61; id. A. 2, 1; 2, 45: apud Graecos magis quam in ceteris nationibus exculta est medicina, Cels. praef. 3, 9.—So of an army, in, with, where in with abl. is commonly used:

    qui apud exercitum cum Lucio Lucullo est,

    in the army under L. Lucullus, Cic. Verr. 4, 49; so id. Arch. 11:

    apud exercitum mihi fueris tot annos,

    id. Mur. 45:

    quod Hannibalem etiam nunc cum imperio apud exercitum haberent,

    in the army with a command, Nep. Hann. 7, 3:

    simul manere apud exercitus Titum utile videbatur,

    Tac. H. 5, 10:

    quod XII. pondo argenti habuisset apud exercitum,

    with his troops, Plin. 33, 4, 50, § 143.—
    5.
    In designating the author of a work or of an assertion, apud aliquem, in, by, in the writings of, any one (the work itself being designated by in with abl.; as, de qua in Catone majore satis multa diximus, Cic. Off. 1, 42, 151:

    Socraiem illum, qui est in Phaedro Platonis,

    id. de Or. 1, 7, 28:

    quo in libro,

    id. ib. 1, 11, 47):

    ut scriptum apud eundem Caelium est,

    Cic. Div. 1, 26, 55:

    apud Xenophontem autem moriens Cyrus major haec dicit,

    id. Sen. 22, 79:

    quod apud Platonem est in philosophos dictum, quod etc.,

    id. Off. 1, 9, 28:

    apud Agathoclem scriptum in historia est,

    id. Div. 1, 24, 50:

    ut est apud poetam nescio quem,

    id. Phil. 2, 65:

    Quod enim est apud Ennium, etc.,

    id. Off. 1, 8, 26:

    de qua (ambitione) praeclare apud eundem est Platonem, simile etc.,

    id. ib. 1, 25, 87:

    Apud Varronem ita est, etc.,

    Plin. 18, 35, 79, § 348:

    ut video scriptum apud Graecos,

    Cic. Scaur. 4:

    invenio apud quosdam auctores,

    Tac. H. 2, 37; so id. A. 1, 81; 3, 3:

    reperio apud scriptores,

    id. ib. 2, 88:

    apud Solonem,

    i. e. in his laws, Cic. Leg. 2, 26, 64:

    cui bono est, si apud te Agamemnon diserte loquitur, i. e. in tragoediis tuis,

    Tac. Or. 9. —Also of speakers:

    apud quosdam acerbior in conviciis narrabatur,

    Tac. Agr. 22.—
    6.
    a.. Est aliquid apud aliquem = est alicui aliquid, apud aliquem being equivalent to dat. of possessor:

    quae (scientia auguralis) mihi videtur apud majores fuisse dupliciter, ut etc.,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 13, 33:

    juris civilis magnum usum apud multos fuisse,

    id. Brut. 41, 152:

    cum apud eum summum esset imperium populi,

    Nep. Phoc. 2, 4:

    omnis gratia, potentia, honos, divitiae apud illos sunt,

    Sall. C. 20, 8:

    par gloria apud Hannibalem hostesque Poenos erat,

    Liv. 22, 30, 8:

    apud quos nulla loricarum galearumve tegmina (erant),

    Tac. A. 12, 35:

    pecuniam ac dona majora apud Romanos (esse),

    id. H. 4, 76:

    minorem esse apud victos animum,

    id. ib. 3, 1;

    2, 75: quando quidem est apud te virtuti honos,

    Liv. 2, 1, 15: Phoebo sua semper apud me Munera sunt, Phoebus has his gifts with me, i. e. I have his gifts for Phoebus, Verg. E. 3, 62; so Hor. C. 3, 29, 5:

    apud te est fons vitae,

    Vulg. Psa. 35, 10:

    apud Dominum (est) misericordia,

    ib. ib. 129, 7.—
    b.
    Est aliquid apud aliquem also simply denotes that something is in one's hands, in his power, at his disposal:

    erat ei apud me pauxillulum Nummorum,

    Ter. Phorm. 1, 1, 3:

    negasse habere se (phaleras): apud alium quoque eas habuisse depositas,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 29:

    multa (signa) deposita apud amicos,

    id. ib. 4, 36:

    apud quem inventus est scyphus,

    Vulg. Gen. 44, 16; ib. [p. 147] Exod. 22, 4; ib. Deut. 24, 12.—So also of persons:

    te pix atra agitet apud carnuficem,

    in the hands of, Plaut. Capt. 3, 4, 65:

    qui (obsides) apud eum sint,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 31; 1, 33.—
    c.
    Apud aliquem = alicui, the dat. of indir. obj.:

    remanet gloria apud me, Att., Trag. Rel. p. 194 Rib.: nihil apud Siculum, nihil apud civem Romanum tota in Sicilia reliquisse,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 2:

    si (cura rei publicae) apud Othonem relinqueretur,

    Tac. H. 1, 13; 1, 20:

    qui judicia manere apud ordinem Senatorium volunt,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 8:

    neque praemia caedis apud interfectorem mansura,

    Tac. H. 2, 70; id. A. 15, 7:

    fidens apud aliquem obligare,

    Dig. 16, 1, 27.—So rarely with adjj.:

    Essetne apud te is servos acceptissimus?

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 5, 56:

    non dicam amicum tuum, quod apud homines carissimum est,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 110:

    apud publicanos gratiosus fuisti,

    id. ib. 2, 169; 4, 38; id. Fl. 76; id. Lig. 31: Apud homines hoc impossibile est;

    apud Deum autem omnia possibilia sunt,

    Vulg. Matt. 19, 26; ib. Marc. 10, 27.
    II.
    Transf. In designations of place,
    A.
    At, near, about, around, before (esp. freq. in the post-Aug. histt.) = ad, prope, circum, ante: tibi servi multi apud mensam adstant, Naev. ap. Prisc. p. 893 P. (Com. Rel. p. 10 Rib.):

    verecundari neminem apud mensam decet,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 4, 77:

    Quid apud hasce aedis negotii est tibi?

    id. Am. 1, 1, 194:

    Quid illisce homines quaerunt apud aedis meas?

    id. Most. 4, 2, 26; id. Trin. 4, 2, 25: apud ignem adsidere, Turp. ap. Non. p. 522, 26 (Com. Rel. p. 100 Rib.); Sisenn. ap. Non. p. 86, 16:

    navem is fregit apud Andrum insulam,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 17:

    apud Tenedum pugna illa navalis,

    Cic. Arch. 21:

    ut apud Salamina classem suam constituerent,

    Nep. Them. 3, 4:

    apud oppidum morati,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 7:

    agri in Hispania apud Karthaginem Novam,

    Cic. Agr. 1, 5:

    bellatum apud Actium,

    Tac. H. 1, 1; 1, 72; 3, 76:

    Pugnabant alii tardis apud Ilion armis,

    Ov. R. Am. 163:

    morabatur in castris apud Galgalam,

    Vulg. Jos. 10, 6:

    quidquid apud durae cessatum est moenia Trojae,

    Verg. A. 11, 288:

    apud vetustam turrem, Att., Trag. Rel. p. 189 Rib.: apud castellum consedisse,

    Tac. A. 4, 25:

    Vitellianos, sua quemque apud signa, componunt,

    id. H. 3, 35:

    apud vexillum tendentes,

    id. A. 1, 17:

    trepidatur apud naves,

    id. H. 2, 15:

    hostis est non apud Anienem, sed in urbe,

    Cic. Mur. 84; id. Fam. 2, 10, 5:

    quam detraxerat apud rapidum Simoenta sub Ilio alto,

    Verg. A. 5, 261:

    apud abunaantem amnem et rapidas undas Inachi, Att., Trag. Rel. p. 175 Rib.: apud gelidi flumina Hebri,

    Verg. A. 12, 331:

    octo apud Rhenum legiones,

    Tac. A. 1, 3:

    apud ripam Rheni,

    id. ib. 2, 83:

    probavi te apud Aquam Contradictionis,

    Vulg. Psa. 80, 8:

    repertus apud fretum Siciliae,

    Tac. A. 6, 14:

    propitiata Juno apud proximum mare,

    id. ib. 15, 44:

    apud promunturium Miseni consedit in villa,

    id. ib. 6, 50:

    Ut aput nivem et ferarum gelida stabula forem, for in nive etc.,

    Cat. 63, 53 Mull.:

    apud altaria deum pepigere,

    before, Tac. A. 11, 9:

    decernuntur supplicationes apud omnia pulvinaria,

    id. ib. 14, 12 (cf.:

    unum diem circa omnia pulvinaria supplicatio fuit,

    Liv. 41, 9):

    apud Caesaris effigiem procubuit,

    Tac. A. 12, 17; 13, 23:

    quartum apud lapidem substiterat,

    id. ib. 15, 60:

    laudavit ipse apud rostra (for pro rostris),

    Tac. A. 16, 6; so, apud forum (cf.: ad forum under ad, I. A. 3., and in Gr. Sophocl. Trach. 371, pros mesêi agorai;

    on the other hand,

    id. ib. 423, en mesêi agorai; id. ib. 524, têlaugei par ochthôi): Quidam apud forum mihi vendidit, Pomp., Com. Rel. p. 250 Rib.: Ch. Qui scis? By. Apud forum modo e Davo audivi, Ter. And. 2, 1, 2; 1, 5, 18:

    Capuae multa apud forum aedificia de caelo tacta,

    Liv. 41, 9 (Weissenb., in foro):

    quod (templum) apud forum holitorium C. Duilius struxerat,

    Tac. A. 2, 49.—
    B.
    At, in = in with abl. or gen. or abl. of place: CONSVLES SENATVM CONSOLVERVNT N. OCTOB. APVD AEDEM DVELONAI, S. C. de Bacch. I.; so,

    ejus statuam majores apud aedem matris deum consecravisse,

    Tac. A. 4, 64:

    apud villam est,

    Ter. Ad. 4, 1, 1; so Cic. Verr. 4, 22, 48:

    Eum argentum sumpsisse apud Thebas ab danista fenore,

    Plaut. Ep. 2, 2, 67:

    deponere apud Solos in delubro pecuniam,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 16, 40:

    ut rationes apud duas civitates possim relinquere,

    id. Att. 6, 7, 2: qui mense Aprili apud Baias essent, id. Fragm. B. 13, 4, 1 B. and K.;

    13, 4, 4 iid.: seditio militum coepta apud Sucronem,

    Liv. 28, 29:

    donum apud Antium statuitur,

    Tac. A. 3, 71:

    bellis civilibus Maecenatem equestris ordinis cunctis apud Romam atque Italiam praeposuit,

    id. ib. 6, 11:

    Titus in consecrando apud Memphim bove Apide diadema gestavit,

    Suet. Tit. 5:

    quod Judaeam praeterveniens apud Hierosolymam non supplicasset,

    id. Aug. 93:

    apud Mediolanum,

    Lact. Mort. Persec. 48:

    eum pugionem apud Capitolium consecravit,

    Tac. A. 15, 74:

    Equitum Romanorum locos sedilibus plebis anteposuit apud Circum,

    id. ib. 15, 32:

    quae (effigies) apud theatrum Pompei locaretur,

    id. ib. 3, 72:

    qui (rei) apud aerarium pependissent,

    Suet. Dom. 9 Roth:

    cujus (scientiae) apiscendae otium apud Rhodum magistrum Thrasullum habuit,

    Tac. A. 6, 20; 4, 14; so Suet. Aug. 92; Eutr. 7, 13:

    ut civitati Cibyraticae apud Asiam subveniretur,

    Tac. A. 4, 13; 4, 18; 16, 15:

    apud Pharsaliam,

    Liv. Epit. 111:

    apud Palaestinam,

    Eutr. 7, 13:

    qui erant apud Helladam,

    Vulg. 1 Macc. 8, 9. —
    III.
    Of time.
    A.
    With words denoting time or occasion, in, at (rare):

    apud saeclum prius,

    Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 15:

    aliquem apud judicium persequi,

    at the trial, Cic. Verr. 4, 104.—
    B.
    With words designating persons, with, among, in the time of:

    hostis apud majores nostros is dicebatur, quem nunc etc.,

    Cic. Off. 1, 12, 36:

    fecerunt hoc multi apud majores nostros,

    id. Verr. 2, 118; 5, 148:

    Fuit eodem ex studio vir eruditus apud patres nostros,

    id. Mur. 36; id. Off. 2, 24, 85; id. Lael. 2, 6:

    Apud antiquos fuit Petron quidam, Cels. praef. 3, 9: aliam apud Fabricios, aliam apud Scipiones pecuniam (fuisse),

    Tac. A. 2, 33.—
    IV.
    For ad with words implying motion (very rare):

    APVT EVM PERVENIRE,

    Inscr. Grut. 786, 5:

    atque apud hunc eo vicinum,

    Plaut. Mil. 2, 5, 70:

    Bito apud aurificem,

    Lucil. 30, 66 Mull.: apud legiones venit, Sall. Fragm. ap. Pomp. Commod. Don. p. 395 Lind.:

    (naves) apud insulas longius sitas ejectae,

    Tac. A. 2, 24:

    qui apud Romanos de societate functus est legatione,

    Vulg. 2 Macc. 4, 11.
    ► Apud has some peculiarities of position, chiefly in Tac.
    (cf. ad, I. fin. b.)
    a.
    It is sometimes placed after its subst.:

    quae fiunt apud fabros, fictores, item alios apud,

    Varr. L. L. 6, 78, p. 104 Mull.:

    Is locus est Cumas aput,

    Lucr. 6, 747 Lachm.:

    montem apud Erycum,

    Tac. A. 4, 43:

    ripam apud Euphratis,

    id. ib. 6, 31:

    Misenum apud et Ravennam,

    id. ib. 4, 5 (in Suet. Dom. 9 the editt. vary between aerarium apud and apud aerarium; the latter seems preferable, and is adopted by Oudend., Bremi, Baumg.-Crus., and Roth).—
    b.
    It is sometimes placed between the subst. and adj.:

    barbaras apud gentes,

    Tac. A. 2, 88, 3, 26; 15, 60:

    non modo Graecis in urbibus, sed Romana apud templa,

    id. ib. 14, 14.—
    c.
    Twice in Verg. it stands before the secondary adjunct of its subst.:

    apud durae moenia Trojae, A. 11, 288: apud gelidi flumina Hebri,

    ib. 12, 331. Apud is never found in compound words. V. more on this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 405-416.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > apud

  • 8 под рукой

    I
    • ПОД РУКОЙ; ПОД РУКАМИ both coll
    [PrepP; these forms only; adv or subj-compl with copula (subj: usu. human or concr)]
    =====
    ⇒ (of or in refer, to things, often household items that are located in convenient places so that one can easily use them; of or in refer, to people who stay or are kept nearby s.o., ready to help him, carry out his orders etc) (a person or thing is) very close by, easily accessible:
    - (close < near>) at hand;
    - at one's (s.o.'s) side (elbow);
    - [of or in refer, to things only] handy;
    - at one's (s.o.'s) fingertips.
         ♦ Мужчине всегда в некоторой степени свойственно желание попетушиться, а тут ещё под рукой такая штучка, как револьвер, почему же не схватить его, если для этого нужно только открыть ночной столик? (Олеша 3). It's always, to a certain extent, the nature of a man to want to ride the high horse, and when a thing like a revolver is close at hand, why not grab it, especially if all one has to do is open the night table? (3a).
         ♦...По-видимому, распорядитель пира не считал, что веселью пришёл конец, и он, как опытный тамада, всегда имел под рукой верное средство для того, чтобы вдохнуть жизнь в замирающее застолье (Катаев 2)....The tamada evidently decided it was not yet time to end the party, and like the experienced master of ceremonies he was, he had at hand a sure means of breathing life into the expiring company (2a).
         ♦ Ежели у человека есть под руками говядина, то он, конечно, охотнее питается ею, нежели другими, менее питательными веществами... (Салтыков-Щедрин 1). If a man has beef on hand, then of course he lives on that more willingly than on other less nourishing substances... (1a).
         ♦ Он отдал распоряжение шофёру. Он приказал референту сообщить в Департамент, что господин прокурор занят... Никого не принимать, отключить телефон и вообще убираться к дьяволу с глаз долой, но так, впрочем, чтобы всё время оставаться под рукой (Стругацкие 2). He gave instructions to his chauffeur and ordered his assistant to inform the department that the prosecutor was occupied. "Don't admit anyone, disconnect the phone. Go to the devil, get out of my sight, but stay within easy reach" (2a).
         ♦ "Я поглотил кучу книг и приобрёл уйму знаний, чтобы быть полезным ей и оказаться под рукой, если бы ей потребовалась моя помощь" (Пастернак 1). "For her sake I devoured piles of books and absorbed a great mass of knowledge, to be available to her if she asked for my help" (1a).
         ♦ "Вы дилетант". Сейчас можно признаться, что тогда я не знал и этого слова. И не имея под рукой словаря иностранных слов, не посмел возражать (Войнович 5). "You're a dilettante." Now I can admit that at the time I had no idea what that word meant, and with no dictionary of foreign words handy, I did not dare object (5a).
    II
    [PrepP; these forms only; adv]
    =====
    ⇒ when worked on, refined, crafted etc by s.o.:
    - under the hand(s) of.
         ♦ Под рукой мастера кусок теста превращается в произведение кулинарного искусства. In the hands of a great chef a lump of dough turns into a work of culinary art.
    • ПОД РУКОЙ <-ю> чьей, (у) кого obsoles, coll
    [PrepP; these forms only; subj-compl with copula (subj: usu. human or collect)]
    =====
    ⇒ a person (or group) is under s.o.'s authority or direction, is totally subjugated to s.o.:
    - X под рукой у Y-a ≈ X is under Y's command (rule, control, thumb);
    - Y controls X.
    IV
    • ПОД РУКОЙ <-ю> obs
    [PrepP; these forms only; adv]
    =====
    ⇒ (to do or say sth.) concealing it from others, without the knowledge of others:
    - discreetly.
         ♦ Ему [помощнику градоначальника] предстояло одно из двух: или немедленно рапортовать о случившемся по начальству и между тем начать под рукой следствие, или же некоторое время молчать и выжидать, что будет (Салтыков-Щедрин 1). Не [the assistant town governor] had two choices: either to report the occurrence to the authorities at once, and secretly begin an investigation in the meantime; or else to keep quiet for a while and see what would happen (1a).
         ♦ "Собираются на обед, на вечер, как в должность, без веселья, холодно, чтоб похвастать поваром, салоном, и потом под рукой осмеять, подставить ногу один другому" (Гончаров 1). [context transl] "If they meet at a dinner or a party, it is just the same as at their office-coldly, without a spark of gaiety, to boast of their chef or their drawing-room, and then to jeer at each other in a discreet aside, to trip one another up" (1a).

    Большой русско-английский фразеологический словарь > под рукой

  • 9 κατά

    κατά (Hom.+) prep. (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά beg., also LfgrE s.v. κατά 1346; with the gen. 74 times in NT; w. acc. 391 times in NT).
    A. w. the gen.
    ⓐ of location that is relatively lower, down from someth. (Hom. et al.; LXX; Ath. 1, 4 κ. κόρρης προπηλακίζειν=to smack on one side of the head) ὁρμᾶν κ. τοῦ κρημνοῦ rush down (from) the bank (cp. Polyb. 38, 16, 7 κ. τῶν κρημνῶν ῥίπτειν; Jos., Bell. 1, 313) Mt 8:32; Mk 5:13; Lk 8:33. κ. κεφαλῆς ἔχειν have someth. on one’s head (lit. hanging down fr. the head, as a veil. Cp. Plut., Mor. 200f ἐβάδιζε κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς ἔχων τὸ ἱμάτιον.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 499, 5 of a mummy ἔχων τάβλαν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου) 1 Cor 11:4.
    ⓑ of position relatively deep, into someth. (Od. 9, 330 κ. σπείους ‘into the depths of the cave’; Hdt. 7, 235; X., An. 7, 1, 30) ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία extreme (lit. ‘reaching down into the depths’; cp. Strabo 9, 3, 5 [419] ἄντρον κοῖλον κ. βάθους) or abysmal poverty 2 Cor 8:2. This may perh. be the mng. of πλήσσειν τινὰ κ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν strike someone deep into the eyes ApcPt 11:26 (cp. Demosth. 19, 197 ξαίνει κ. τοῦ νώτου; PPetr II, 18 [2b], 15 [246 B.C.] ἔτυπτεν αὐτὸν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου).—κ. γαστρός Just., D. 78, 3 for ἐν γαστρί Mt 1:18 (cp. Ath. 35, 2 τὸ κ. γαστρὸς ζῶον εἶναι).
    ⓒ extension in various directions within an area, throughout (so in Luke’s writings; Polyb. 3, 19, 7 κ. τῆς νήσου διεσπάρησαν; PGiss 48, 8 κ. κυριακῆς γῆς; Jos., Ant. 8, 297; SibOr 3, 222; 4, 24; 5, 305) γνωστὸν γενέσθαι καθʼ ὅλης Ἰόππης become known throughout all Joppa Ac 9:42. καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 9:31; 10:37; Lk 23:5. φήμη ἐξῆλθεν καθʼ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου 4:14.
    ② down upon, toward, against someone or someth, fig. ext. of 1.
    ⓐ w. verbs of swearing, to denote what one swears by (Thu. 5, 47, 8; Lysias 32, 13; Isaeus 7, 28; Demosth. 21, 119; 29, 26; SIG 526, 4ff; 685, 25; UPZ 110, 39 [164 B.C.]; BGU 248, 13; Jdth 1:12; Is 45:23; 2 Ch 36:13) by ἐξορκίζειν (q.v.) Mt 26:63. ὀμνύναι (q.v.) Hb 6:13, 16. ὁρκίζειν (q.v.) Hs 9, 10, 5. Sim. ἐρωτᾶν κ. τινος request, entreat by someone Hv 3, 2, 3.
    ⓑ in a hostile sense, against
    α. after verbs that express hostile action, etc. διχάζειν Mt 10:35. ἐπαίρεσθαι 2 Cor 10:5. ἰσχύειν Ac 19:16. κακοῦν 14:2. στρατεύεσθαι 1 Pt 2:11. φυσιοῦσθαι 1 Cor 4:6
    β. after words and expressions that designate hostile speech, esp. an accusation ἔχειν (τι) κ. τινος have or hold someth. against someone Rv 2:4, 14, 20. φέρειν J 18:29. ἐγκαλεῖν Ro 8:33. ἐντυγχάνειν τινὶ κ. τινος 11:2 (TestJob 17:5). κατηγορεῖν Lk 23:14. ποιεῖν κρίσιν Jd 15a. τὸ κ. ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον the bond that stands against us Col 2:14. ἐμφανίζειν Ac 24:1; 25:2. αἰτεῖσθαί τι 25:3, 15. αἱ κ. τινος αἰτίαι vs. 27. εἰπεῖν πονηρόν Mt 5:11 (cp. Soph., Phil. 65 κακὰ λέγειν κ. τινος. X., Hell. 1, 5, 2; Isocr., C. Nic. 13; Plut., Mor. 2a λέγειν κ.; SIG 1180, 1 λέγειν κ. τινος; Just., A I, 23, 3; 49, 6 κ. τῶν … ὁμολογούντων). λαλεῖν ῥήματα Ac 6:13; cp. Jd 15b (TestDan 4:3; JosAs 23:15). μαρτυρεῖν κ. τ. θεοῦ give testimony in contradiction to God 1 Cor 15:15. ζητεῖν μαρτυρίαν κ. τινος testimony against someone Mk 14:55. ψευδομαρτυρεῖν 14:56f. ψευδομαρτυρία Mt 26:59. γογγύζειν 20:11. στενάζειν Js 5:9. διδάσκειν Ac 21:28. συμβούλιον διδόναι (ποιεῖν v.l.) Mk 3:6; ς. λαβεῖν Mt 27:1. ψεύδεσθαι Js 3:14 (Lysias 22, 7; X., Ap. 13; Ath. 35, 1 καθʼ ἡμῶν … κατεψεύσατο).
    γ. after expressions that designate such a position or state of mind in a different way εἶναι κ. τινος be against someone (opp. ὑπέρ) Mk 9:40 (WNestle, ZNW 13, 1912, 84–87; AFridrichsen, ibid., 273–80); Ro 8:31; (opp. μετά) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23. δύνασθαί τι κ. τινος be able to do someth. against someone 2 Cor 13:8. ἔχειν τι κ. τινος have someth. against someone (in one’s heart) Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; Hs 9, 24, 2; cp. ibid. 23, 2, where the acc. is to be supplied. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. ἐπιθυμεῖν Gal 5:17. μερίζεσθαι καθʼ ἑαυτῆς Mt 12:25. Cp. 1 Cl 39:4 (Job 4:18).—κατά prob. means against also in ἔβαλεν κατʼ αὐτῆς ἄνεμος Ac 27:14. ἐτελείωσαν κ. τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα they completed the full measure of sins against their own head GPt 5:17.
    B. w. acc. (so in the NT 399 times [besides καθʼ εἷς and κατὰ εἷς])
    ⓐ of extension in space, along, over, through, in, upon (Hom. et al.; OGI 90, 7 ἐκ τῶν κ. τ. χώραν ἱερῶν; PHib 82, 19; PTebt 5, 188; LXX; Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 5) Ac 24:12. καθʼ ὅλην τ. πόλιν throughout the city Lk 8:39 (cp. Diod S 4, 10, 6 καθʼ ὅλην τὴν Ἐλλάδα). ἐγένετο λιμὸς κ. τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην 15:14. κ. τὰς κώμας 9:6. κ. πόλεις καὶ κώμας 13:22 (Appian., Maced. 9 §1 and 4 κ. πόλεις; Just., A I, 67, 3 κ. πόλεις ἢ ἀγρούς).—κ. τόπους in place after place Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8; Lk 21:11 (Theophr., περὶ σημ. 1, 4 p. 389 W.; Cat. Cod. Astr. III 28, 11 ἐν μέρει τ. ἀνατολῆς κ. τόπους, VIII/3, 186, 1 λιμὸς καὶ λοιμὸς καὶ σφαγαὶ κ. τόπους). οἱ ὄντες κ. τὴν Ἰουδαίαν those throughout Judea or living in Judea Ac 11:1. διασπαρῆναι κ. τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας be scattered over the regions of Judea 8:1. κ. τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν in the congregation there 13:1. τοῖς κ. τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν καὶ Συρίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν ἀδελφοῖς 15:23. τοὺς κ. τὰ ἔθνη Ἰουδαίους the Judeans (dispersed) throughout the nations 21:21. τοῖς κ. τὸν νόμον γεγραμμένοις throughout the law = in the law 24:14b. κ. τὴν ὁδόν along or on the way (Lucian, Catapl. 4; Jos., Ant. 8, 404) Lk 10:4; Ac 25:3; 26:13. τὸ κ. Κιλικίαν καὶ Παμφυλίαν πέλαγος the sea along the coast of Cilicia and Pamphylia 27:5; but the geographical designation τὰ μέρη τ. Λιβύης τῆς κ. Κυρήνην 2:10 prob. belongs to b: the parts of Libya toward Cyrene.
    ⓑ of extension toward, toward, to, up to ἐλθεῖν (γίνεσθαι v.l.) κ. τὸν τόπον come up to the place (Jos., Vi. 283) Lk 10:32. ἐλθόντες κ. τὴν Μυσίαν to Mysia Ac 16:7; cp. 27:7. πορεύεσθαι κ. μεσημβρίαν (s. μεσημβρία 2) toward the south 8:26 (cp. Jos., Bell. 5, 505). κ. σκοπὸν διώκειν run (over the course) toward the goal Phil 3:14. λιμὴν βλέπων κ. λίβα καὶ κ. χῶρον a harbor open to the southwest and northwest Ac 27:12 (s. βλέπω 8).—κ. πρόσωπον to the face (cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 205) Gal 2:11. ἔχειν τινὰ κ. πρόσωπον meet someone face to face (Thieme 19 has reff. for the use of κατὰ πρόσωπον as a legal formula) Ac 25:16. κ. πρόσωπον ταπεινός humble when personally present 2 Cor 10:1. κ. πρόσωπόν τινος in the presence of someone Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13. τὰ κ. πρόσωπον what lies before one’s eyes, i.e. is obvious 2 Cor 10:7. κ. ὀφθαλμοὺς προγράφειν portray before one’s eyes Gal 3:1.
    ⓒ of isolation or separateness, by (Thu. 1, 138, 6 οἱ καθʼ ἑαυτοὺς Ἕλληνες ‘the Greeks by themselves’; Polyb. 1, 24, 4; 5, 78, 3; 11, 17, 6; Diod S 13, 72, 8; Gen 30:40; 43:32; 2 Macc 13:13; Philo, Migr. Abr. 87; 90; Just., D. 4, 5 αὐτὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν γενομένη; Tat. 13, 1 ἡ ψυχὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν; Ath. 15, 2 ὁ πηλὸς καθʼ ἑαυτόν) ἔχειν τι καθʼ ἑαυτόν keep someth. to oneself Ro 14:22 (cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 255; Heliod. 7, 16, 1). καθʼ ἑαυτὸν μένειν live by oneself of the private dwelling of Paul in Rome Ac 28:16. πίστις νεκρὰ καθʼ ἑαυτήν faith by itself is dead Js 2:17 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 3, 43 τὸ σῶμα καθʼ αὑτὸ νεκρόν ἐστιν). ἡ κατʼ οἶκον ἐκκλησία the congregation in the house Ro 16:5; 1 Cor 16:19. κατʼ ἰδίαν s. ἴδιος 5. κ. μόνας (Thu. 1, 32, 5; Menand., Epitr. 988 S. [658 Kö.], Fgm. 146 Kö. [158 Kock]; Polyb. 4, 15, 11; Diod S 4, 51, 16; BGU 813, 15 [s. APF 2, 1903, 97]; LXX) alone, by oneself Mk 4:10; Lk 9:18; Hm 11:8 (here, as well as BGU loc. cit. and LXX, written as one word καταμόνας).
    ⓓ of places viewed serially, distributive use w. acc., x by x (Arrian., Anab. 4, 21, 10 κ. σκηνήν=tent by tent) or from x to x: κατʼ οἶκον from house to house (PLond III, 904, 20 p. 125 [104 A.D.] ἡ κατʼ οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή) Ac 2:46b; 5:42 (both in ref. to various house assemblies or congregations; w. less probability NRSV ‘at home’); cp. 20:20. Likew. the pl. κ. τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος 8:3. κ. τὰς συναγωγάς 22:19. κ. πόλιν (Jos., Ant. 6, 73) from city to city IRo 9:3, but in every (single) city Ac 15:21; 20:23; Tit 1:5. Also κ. πόλιν πᾶσαν (cp. Herodian 1, 14, 9) Ac 15:36; κ. πᾶσαν πόλιν 20:23 D. κ. πόλιν καὶ κώμην Lk 8:1; cp. vs. 4.
    ② marker of temporal aspect (Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX, apolog.)
    ⓐ in definite indications of time: at, on, during (Hdt. 8, 17; Polemon Soph. B 43 Reader κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν ‘in the course of that day’) κατʼ ἀρχάς in the beginning (cp. ἀρχή 1b) Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26). κ. τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ in the day of trial 3:8 (Ps 94:8.—Cp. Antig. Car. 173 κ. τὸν σπόρου καιρόν). νεκροῦ … ἀνάστασιν κατʼ αὐτὸν γεγονυῖαν ἱστορεῖ (Papias) reports that a resurrection from the dead occurred in his time Papias (2, 9; so, with personal names, Hdt.; Just., D. 23, 1 τοῦ θεοῦ … τοῦ κ. τὸν Ἐνώχ; Tat. 31, 2 Θεαγένης … κ. Καμβύσην γεγονώς). Of the future: κ. τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον at that time, then Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10). Of the past: κ. ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρόν at that time, then (2 Macc 3:5; TestJos 12:1; Jos., Ant. 8, 266; cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο τοῦ καιροῦ Konon: 26 Fgm. 3 p. 191, 25 Jac.; Just., A I, 17, 2; 26, 3 al.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. κ. καιρόν at that time, then Ro 5:6 (Just., D. 132, 1; cp. OGI 90, 28 καθʼ ὸ̔ν καιρόν), unless καιρός here means the right time (s. καιρός 1b end). κατʼ ὄναρ (as καθʼ ὕπνον Gen 20:6; Just., D 60, 5 κ. τοὺς ὕπνους) during a dream, in a dream Mt 1:20; 2:12 (s. s.v. ὄναρ for ins).
    ⓑ with indefinite indications of time: toward, about κ. τὸ μεσονύκτιον about midnight Ac 16:25; cp. 27:27.—8:26 (s. μεσημβρία 1).
    ⓒ distributively (cp. 1d): x period by x period: κατʼ ἔτος every year (s. ἔτος) Lk 2:41. Also κατʼ ἐνιαυτόν (s. ἐνιαυτός 1) Hb 9:25; 10:1, 3. καθʼ ἡμέραν daily, every day (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Mt 26:55; Mk 14:49; Lk 16:19; 22:53; Ac 2:46f; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11; 19:9; 1 Cor 15:31; Hb 7:27; 10:11. Also τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Lk 11:3; 19:47; Ac 17:11 v.l. ἡ ἐπίστασις ἡ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἐπίστασις) 2 Cor 11:28. κ. πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day (Jos., Ant. 6, 49) Ac 17:7. Also καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Hb 3:13. κ. μίαν σαββάτου on the first day of every week 1 Cor 16:2. κ. πᾶν σάββατον every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21b; 18:4. κ. μῆνα ἕκαστον each month Rv 22:2 (κ. μῆνα as SIG 153, 65; POxy 275, 18; 2 Macc 6:7). κ. ἑορτήν at each festival Mt 27:15; Mk 15:6.
    ③ marker of division of a greater whole into individual parts, at a time, in detail, distributive use apart from indications of place (s. above 1d) and time (s. 2c)
    ⓐ w. numerals: κ. δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς two or, at the most, three at a time (i.e. in any one meeting, cp. ἀνὰ μέρος) 1 Cor 14:27 (Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 42 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς; Jos., Ant. 3, 142 κ. ἕξ; 5, 172 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς). καθʼ ἕνα (on this and the foll. s. εἷς 5e) singly, one after the other vs. 31. κ. ἕνα λίθον each individual stone Hs 9, 3, 5; καθʼ ἕνα λίθον 9, 6, 3. κ. ἓν ἕκαστον one by one, in detail Ac 21:19; 1 Cl 32:1 (Ath. 28, 4 καθʼ ἕκαστον). εἷς καθʼ εἷς Mk 14:19; J 8:9; cp. Ro 12:5 (B-D-F §305; Rob. 460). κ. ἑκατὸν καὶ κ. πεντήκοντα in hundreds and in fifties Mk 6:40.
    ⓑ περί τινος λέγειν κ. μέρος speak of someth. in detail Hb 9:5 (s. μέρος 1c). κατʼ ὄνομα (each one) by name (ἀσπάζομαι … τοὺς ἐνοίκους πάντες κα[τʼ] ὄνομα PTebt [III A.D.] 422, 11–16; Jos., Vi. 86) J 10:3; 3J 15 (cp. BGU 27, 18); ISm 13:2.
    ④ marker of intention or goal, for the purpose of, for, to (Thu. 6, 31, 1 κ. θέαν ἥκειν=to look at something; cp. Sb 7263, 6 [254 B.C.]; X., An. 3, 5, 2 καθʼ ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι; Arrian, Anab. 1, 17, 12; 4, 5, 1; 21, 9; 6, 17, 6; 26, 2; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 2, 29; Anton. Lib., Fab. 24, 1 Δημήτηρ ἐπῄει γῆν ἅπασαν κ. ζήτησιν τῆς θυγατρός; 38; Jdth 11:19) κ. τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῶν Ἰουδαίων for the Jewish ceremonial purification J 2:6. κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω to my shame 2 Cor 11:21 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 268 κ. τιμὴν τ. θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν). ἀπόστολος … κ. πίστιν … καὶ ἐπίγνωσιν an apostle … for the faith … and the knowledge Tit 1:1 (but the mng. ‘in accordance with’ is also prob.).
    ⑤ marker of norm of similarity or homogeneity, according to, in accordance with, in conformity with, according to
    ⓐ to introduce the norm which governs someth.
    α. the norm of the law, etc. (OGI 56, 33; Mitt-Wilck., I/2, 352, 11 κ. τὰ κελευσθέντα [as Just., D. 78, 7]; POxy 37 II, 8) κ. τὸν νόμον (Jos., Ant. 14, 173; 15, 51; Just., D. 10, 1 al.; Ath. 31, 1; κ. τοὺς νόμους Ἀρεοπαγείτης, letter of MAurelius: ZPE 8, ’71, 169, ln. 27) Lk 2:22; J 18:31; 19:7; Hb 7:5. τὰ κ. τ. νόμον what is to be done according to the law Lk 2:39 (cp. EpArist 32). κ. τὸ ὡρισμένον in accordance w. what has been determined 22:22. Cp. 1:9; 2:24, 27, 42; Ac 17:2; 22:3. κ. τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου Ro 2:16; 16:25a; 2 Ti 2:8. κ. τὸ εἰρημένον Ro 4:18 (cp. Ath. 28, 1 κ. τὰ προειρημένα). κ. τὰς γραφάς (Just., D. 82, 4; cp. Paus. 6, 21, 10 κ. τὰ ἔπη=according to the epic poems; Just., A I, 32, 14 κ. τὸ λόγιον, D. 67, 1 κ. τὴν προφητείαν ταύτην) 1 Cor 15:3; cp. Js 2:8. κ. τὴν παράδοσιν Mk 7:5 (Tat. 39, 1 κ. τὴν Ἑλλήνων παράδοσιν).—κ. λόγον as one wishes (exx. in Dssm., B 209 [not in BS]; also PEleph 13, 1; 3 Macc 3:14) Ac 18:14 (though 5bβ below is also prob.).—It can also stand simply w. the acc. of the pers. according to whose will, pleasure, or manner someth. occurs κ. θεόν (cp. Socrat., Ep. 14, 5 κ. θεόν; 26, 2; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 1 Jac. and Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 84 §352 κ. δαίμονα; Jos., Ant. 4, 143 ὁ κ. τοῦτον[=θεόν] βίος; Just., D. 5, 1 κ. τινας … Πλατωνικούς; Tat. 1, 3 κ. … τὸν κωμικόν) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9–11; κ. Χριστὸν Ἰ. Ro 15:5. κ. κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. Cp. 1 Pt 1:15. κ. τ. Ἕλληνας in the manner of the Greeks, i.e. polytheists PtK 2, p. 14, 1; 7. κ. Ἰουδαίους ln. 25.
    β. the norm according to which a judgment is rendered, or rewards or punishments are given ἀποδοῦναι τινι κ. τ. πρᾶξιν or ἔργα αὐτοῦ (Ps 61:13; Pr 24:12; Just., A I, 12, 1; 17, 4 al.; κατʼ ἀξίαν τῶν πράξεων) Mt 16:27; Ro 2:6; 2 Ti 4:14; Rv 2:23. μισθὸν λήμψεται κ. τ. ἴδιον κόπον 1 Cor 3:8. κρίνειν κ. τι J 7:24; 8:15; 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Ro 2:2.
    γ. of a standard of any other kind κ. τ. χρόνον ὸ̔ν ἠκρίβωσεν in accordance w. the time which he had ascertained Mt 2:16. κ. τ. πίστιν ὑμῶν acc. to your faith 9:29. κ. τ. δύναμιν acc. to his capability 25:15 (Just., D. 139, 4; Tat. 12, 3; cp. Just., A II, 13, 6 κ. δύναμιν). Cp. Lk 1:38; 2:29; Ro 8:4; 10:2; Eph 4:7. ἀνὴρ κ. τ. καρδίαν μου Ac 13:22 (καρδία 1bε).
    δ. Oft. the norm is at the same time the reason, so that in accordance with and because of are merged: οἱ κ. πρόθεσιν κλητοί Ro 8:28. κατʼ ἐπιταγὴν θεοῦ 16:26; 1 Ti 1:1; Tit 1:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Eph 3:3 (Just., D. 78, 2). οἱ καθʼ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ Ro 2:7. κατʼ ἐκλογήν 11:5 (Just., D. 49, 1). Cp. κ. τὴν βουλήν Eph 1:11 (Just., A I, 63, 16 al.); 2 Th 2:9; Hb 7:16. κ. τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο; by what shall I know this? (cp. Gen 15:8) Lk 1:18.—Instead of ‘in accordance w.’ κ. can mean simply because of, as a result of, on the basis of (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 219 D.: κ. τοὺς νόμους; Jos., Ant. 1, 259; 278; Just., A I, 54, 1 κατʼ ἐνέργειαν τῶν φαύλων δαιμόνων; Ath. 7, 1 κ. συμπάθειαν τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ πνοῆς; 32, 1 κ. χρησμόν). κ. πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any and every reason (αἰτία 1) Mt 19:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Gal 2:2. Cp. Ro 2:5; 1 Cor 12:8 (κ. τ. πνεῦμα = διὰ τοῦ πν.); Eph 1:5; 4:22b; Phil 4:11; 1 Ti 5:21; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 3:5; κ. ἀνάγκην Phlm 14 (Ar. 1, 2; 4, 2 al.; Just., A I, 30, 1; 61, 10; Ath. 24, 2); IPol 1:3. ὁ κ. τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 Pt 1:3.—καθʼ ὅσον (Thu. 4, 18, 4) in so far as, inasmuch as Hb 3:3. καθʼ ὅσον …, κ. τοσοῦτο in so far as …, just so far (Lysias 31, 8; Galen, De Dignosc. Puls. 3, 2, VIII 892 K.) 7:20, 22.
    ⓑ as a periphrasis to express equality, similarity, or example in accordance with, just as, similar(ly) to (TestJob 32:6 τίς γὰρ κ. σε ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου; Tat. 25, 1 κ. … τὸν Πρωτέα like Proteus; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 50: sheep are not burden-bearers κ. τοὺς ὄνους=as donkeys are).
    α. κ. τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε do not do as they do Mt 23:3. κ. Ἰσαάκ just as Isaac Gal 4:28. κ. θεὸν κτισθείς Eph 4:24 (Synes., Prov. 2, 2 p. 118c κ. θεόν=just as a god). Cp. Col 3:10. κ. τὸν τύπον Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40; Mel., P. 58, 424 [νόμον v.l.]). Cp. 5:6 (Ps 109:4); 8:9 (Jer 38: 32); Js 3:9.—κ. τὰ αὐτά in (just) the same way (OGI 56, 66; PEleph 2, 6; 1 Macc 8:27; 12:2; Just., D. 1, 2; 3, 5; 113, 3) Lk 6:23, 26; 17:30; Dg 3:1. On the other hand, the sing. κ. τὸ αὐτό Ac 14:1 means together (marriage contract PEleph 1, 5 [IV B.C.] εἶναι ἡμᾶς κ. ταὐτό; 1 Km 11:11). καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον just as (2 Macc 6:20; 4 Macc 14:17) Ac 15:11; 27:25. καθʼ ὅσον …, οὕτως (just) as …, so Hb 9:27. κ. πάντα τρόπον in every way (PSI 520, 16 [250 B.C.]; PCairZen 631, 2; 3 Macc 3:24) Ro 3:2. κ. μηδένα τρόπον (PMagd 14, 9 [221 B.C.]; PRein 7, 31; 3 Macc 4:13; 4 Macc 4:24; Just., D. 35, 7; s. Reader, Polemo 262) 2 Th 2:3. Cp. Johannessohn, Kasus, 1910, 82. κατά w. acc. serves in general
    β. to indicate the nature, kind, peculiarity or characteristics of a thing (freq. as a periphrasis for the adv.; e.g. Antiochus of Syracuse [V B.C.]: 555 Fgm. 12 Jac. κ. μῖσος=out of hate, filled with hate) κατʼ ἐξουσίαν with authority or power Mk 1:27. κ. συγκυρίαν by chance Lk 10:31. κ. ἄγνοιαν without knowing Ac 3:17 (s. ἄγνοια 2a). κ. ἄνθρωπον 1 Cor 3:3 al. (s. Straub 15; Aeschyl., Th. 425; ἄνθρωπος 2b). κ. κράτος powerfully, Ac 19:20 (κράτος 1a). κ. λόγον reasonably, rightly (Pla.; Polyb. 1, 62, 4; 5; 5, 110, 10; Jos., Ant. 13, 195; PYale 42, 24 [12 Jan., 229 B.C.]) 18:14 (but s. above 5aα). λέγειν τι κ. συγγνώμην οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν say someth. as a concession, not as a command 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. κ. τάξιν in (an) order(ly manner) 1 Cor 14:40 (τάξις 2). κατʼ ὀφθαλμοδουλίαν with eye-service Eph 6:6. μηδὲν κατʼ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κ. κενοδοξίαν Phil 2:3. κ. ζῆλος zealously 3:6a, unless this pass. belongs under 6 below, in its entirety. κ. σάρκα on the physical plane Ro 8:12f; 2 Cor 1:17; also 5:16ab, if here κ. ς. belongs w. οἴδαμεν or ἐγνώκαμεν (as Bachmann, JWeiss, H-D Wendland, Sickenberger take it; s. 7a below). καθʼ ὑπερβολήν (PTebt 42, 5f [c. 114 B.C.] ἠδικημένος καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὸ, Ἁρμιύσιος; 4 Macc 3:18) beyond measure, beyond comparison Ro 7:13; 1 Cor 12:31; 2 Cor 4:17. καθʼ ὁμοιότητα (Aristot.; Gen 1:12; Philo, Fug. 51; Tat. 12, 4 κ. τὸ ὅμοιον αὐτῇ) in a similar manner Hb 4:15b. κ. μικρόν in brief B 1:5 (μικρός 1eγ).
    ⑥ denoting relationship to someth., with respect to, in relation to κ. σάρκα w. respect to the flesh, physically of human descent Ro 1:3; 4:1; 9:3, 5 (Ar. 15, 7 κ. σάρκα … κ. ψυχήν; Just., D. 43, 7 ἐν τῷ γένει τῷ κ. σάρκα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ al.). κ. τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 7:22 (cp. POxy 904, 6 πληγαῖς κατακοπτόμενον κ. τὸ σῶμα). Cp. Ro 1:4; 11:28; Phil 3:5, 6b (for vs. 6a s. 5bβ above); Hb 9:9b. τὰ κ. τινα (Hdt. 7, 148; Diod S 1, 10, 73; Aelian, VH 2, 20; PEleph 13, 3; POxy 120, 14; Tob 10:9; 1 Esdr 9:17; 2 Macc 3:40; 9:3 al.) someone’s case, circumstances Ac 24:22 (cp. PEleph 13, 3 τὰ κ. σε; Just., A I, 61, 13 τὰ κ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν πάντα, D. 102, 2 τὰ κ. αὐτόν; Ath. 24, 4 τὸ κ. τοὺς ἀγγέλους); 25:14; Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. κ. πάντα in all respects (since Thu. 4, 81, 3; Sb 4324, 3; 5761, 22; SIG 834, 7; Gen 24:1; Wsd 19:22; 2 Macc 1:17; 3 Macc 5:42; JosAs 1:7; Just., A II, 4, 4, D. 35, 8 al.); Ac 17:22; Col 3:20, 22a; Hb 2:17 (Artem. 1, 13 αὐτῷ ὅμοιον κ. π.); 4:15a.
    ⑦ Somet. the κατά phrase, which would sound cumbersome in the rendering ‘such-and-such’, ‘in line with’, or ‘in accordance with’, is best rendered as an adj., a possessive pron., or with a genitival construction to express the perspective from which something is perceived or to be understood. In translation it thus functions as
    ⓐ an adj. (Synes., Kingdom 4 p. 4d τὰ κατʼ ἀρετὴν ἔργα i.e. the deeds that are commensurate with that which is exceptional = virtuous deeds; PHib 27, 42 ταῖς κ. σελήνην ἡμέραις; 4 Macc 5:18 κ. ἀλήθειαν=ἀληθής; Just., A I, 2, 1 τοὺς κ. ἀλήθειαν εὐσεβεῖς; Tat. 26, 2 τῆς κ. ἀλήθειαν σοφίας) οἱ κ. φύσιν κλάδοι the natural branches Ro 11:21. ἡ κατʼ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Tit 1:1b. οἱ κ. σάρκα κύριοι the earthly masters (in wordplay, anticipating the κύριος who is in the heavens, vs. 9) Eph 6:5. Cp. 2 Cor 5:16b, in case (s. 5bβ above) κ. ς. belongs w. Χριστόν (as the majority, incl. Ltzm., take it): a physical Christ, a Christ in the flesh, in his earthly relationships (σάρξ 5). Correspondingly in vs. 16a κ. ς. would be taken w. οὐδένα: no one simply as a physical being.—JMartyn, JKnox Festschr., ’67, 269–87.
    ⓑ a possessive pron., but with limiting force (Demosth. 2, 27 τὰ καθʼ ὑμᾶς ἐλλείμματα [i.e. in contrast to the activities of others: ‘your own’]; Aelian, VH 2, 42 ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ἀρετή; 3, 36; OGI 168, 17 παραγεγονότες εἰς τοὺς καθʼ ὑμᾶς τόπους; SIG 646, 6; 807, 15 al.; UPZ 20, 9 [II B.C.] ἐπὶ τῆς καθʼ ἡμᾶς λειτουργίας; PTebt 24, 64; 2 Macc 4:21; Tat. 42, 1 τίς ὁ θεὸς καὶ τίς ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ποίησις; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7 ἡ καθʼ ἡμᾶς φιλοσοφία) τῶν καθʼ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν τινες some of your (own) poets Ac 17:28. ἡ καθʼ ὑμᾶς πίστις Eph 1:15. ὁ καθʼ ὑμᾶς νόμος Ac 18:15. τὸ κατʼ ἐμὲ πρόθυμον my eagerness Ro 1:15.
    ⓒ a gen. w. a noun (Polyb. 3, 113, 1 ἡ κ. τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατολή; 2, 48, 2; 3, 8, 1 al.; Diod S 14, 12 ἡ κ. τὸν τύραννον ὠμότης; Dionys. Hal. 2, 1; SIG 873, 5 τῆς κ. τ. μυστήρια τελετῆς; 569, 22; 783, 20; PTebt 5, 25; PLond III, 1164k, 20 p. 167 [212 A.D.] ὑπὸ τοῦ κ. πατέρα μου ἀνεψιοῦ) τὰ κ. Ἰουδαίους ἔθη the customs of the Judeans Ac 26:3 (Tat. 12, 5 τῇ κ. Βαβυλωνίους προγνωστικῇ; 34, 2 ἡ κ. τὸν Ἀριστόδημον πλαστική). Cp. 27:2. ἡ κ. πίστιν δικαιοσύνη the righteousness of faith Hb 11:7. ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις purpose of election Ro 9:11.—Here also belong the titles of the gospels εὐαγγέλιον κατὰ Ματθαῖον etc., where κατά is likew. periphrasis for a gen. (cp. JLydus, De Mag. 3, 46 p. 136, 10 Wünsch τῆς κ. Λουκανὸν συγγραφῆς; Herodian 2, 9, 4 of an autobiography ἐν τῷ καθʼ αὑτὸν βίῳ; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 18 τ. καθʼ αὐτὸν ἱστορίαν; 2 Macc 2:13. Cp. B-D-F §163; 224, 2; Zahn, Einleitung §49; BBacon, Why ‘According to Mt’? Exp., 8th ser., 16, 1920, 289–310).—On the periphrasis of the gen. by κατά s. Rudberg (ἀνά beg.) w. many exx. fr. Pla. on. But it occurs as early as Thu. 6, 16, 5 ἐν τῷ κατʼ αὐτοὺς βίῳ.—M-M. DELG. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κατά

  • 10 accipiō

        accipiō cēpī, ceptus, ere    [ad+capio], to take without effort, receive, get, accept. — Of voluntary taking, to take, accept, take into possession, receive: obsides, Cs.: divitias, N.: aliquid a patre, inherit, N.: suspitio acceptae pecuniae ob rem iudicandam (of a bribe): pecuniam per Volcatium, by the hands of: alqm gremio, V.: milites urbe tectisve, L.: sucos ore aut volnere, O. — Fig.: oculis aut pectore noctem, V.—To admit, let in: armatos in arcem, L.: alqm in amicitiam: (parentes) in civitatem, to citizenship, L.— To take under protection: (virginem) accepi, acceptam servabo, T.: taedā accepta iugali, i. e. wedded, O.—To receive as a guest, entertain, welcome: Laurentes nymphae, accipite Aenean, V.: quam Delos orantem accepit, O.: (eum) in vestram fidem, into your confidence.— Ironically, to entertain, deal with, treat: indignis modis, T.: quo te modo accepissem, nisi iratus essem: eum male acceptum... coegit, etc. (of a defeated enemy), N.—In busines, to collect (money): a praetore pecuniam. — acceptus, P., received, collected: accepta pecunia. — Esp. in the phrase, referre acceptum (alqd), to credit, give credit for: amplius sestertium ducentiens acceptum hereditatibus rettuli, entered to the credit of inheritance, i. e. owe to bequests: alcui vitam suam referre acceptam, acknowledge that he owes his life, etc.: salutem imperi uni omnes acceptam relaturos, Cs. — In law: sponsionem acceptam facere, to discharge the bond, acknowledge payment of the sponsio.—Of involuntary taking, to receive, get, be the recipient of, take, submit to, suffer, bear: volnera tergo, V.: graviore volnere accepto, Cs.: cum semel accepit solem (leo), has felt the power of, H.: hunc metum, i. e. take this risk, T.: contumeliam, T. — Esp. of places, to admit, take in, receive, open to: Strophadum me litora primum Accipiunt, V.: nullae eum urbes accipiunt, nulla moenia, L.: illum unda accipit sinu vasto, V. — Fig., of perception and thought: quae accepi auribus, T.: mandata auribus: quem ipse accepi oculis animoque sensum, hunc, etc., the impression I received.—In gen., to take, hear, attend to, perceive, understand, learn: Accipe nunc Danaum insidias, listen to, V.: sicut ego accepi, as I have heard, S.: ut accepi a senibus: accipite... veterem orationem Archytae: quae postea acciderant, Cs.: reliquos ne famā quidem acceperunt, have not heard of them, Cs.: si te aequo animo ferre accipiet, T.: hoc sic fieri solere accepimus: ex parente ita accepi, munditias mulieribus convenire, S.: ut celeriter acciperet quae tradebantur, understood, N.— Absol: non recte accipis, T.: volenti animo de ambobus acceperant, had eagerly welcomed news of both, S.—In partic., of a word or pledge, take: accipe daque fidem, i. e. exchange solemn assurances, V.—Praegn., to take, interpret, explain: ad contumeliam omnia, to regard as an insult, T.: his in maius acceptis, being exaggerated, L.: hoc in bonam partem, take kindly: alqd durius: facinus severe accipere, with displeasure: aliter tuom amorem atque est, T.: aequo animo, S. — Accipere aliquid in omen, to regard a thing as an omen, accept the omen: id a plerisque in omen magni terroris acceptum, L.; but accipere omen, to receive as a ( favorable) omen, L.—With ellips. of omen: Accipio, adgnoscoque deos, I accept ( the omen) and, etc., V.—To accept, be satisfied with, approve: dos, Pamphile, est decem talenta. Pam. Accipio, T.: ‘equi te esse feri similem, dico.’ Ridemus et ipse Messius, ‘accipio,’ I allow it, exactly so, H.: ab hoste armato condicionem, Cs.— To take upon one, undertake, assume, undergo: bellum, quod novus imperator noster accipiat, in which... succeeds to the command: causam: eos (magistratūs): iudicium (of the defendant), stand the trial: iudicium accipere pro Quinctio, i. e. agree for Q. to stand trial.
    * * *
    accipere, accepi, acceptus V TRANS
    take, grasp, receive, accept, undertake; admit, let in, hear, learn; obey

    Latin-English dictionary > accipiō

  • 11 παρά

    παρά (Hom.+. On elision s. B-D-F §17; Rob. 208) prep. w. three cases (Kühner-G. §440; Schwyzer II 491–98; B-D-F §236–38; Rob. 612–16. Further lit. s.v. ἀνά, beg.; also HRau, De praepositionis παρά usu: GCurtius, Studien etc. III 1870).
    A. W. gen., which nearly always as in Hom., Hdt., Pla., X. et al. denotes a pers., and indicates that someth. proceeds fr. this pers. (Hs 2:3 is an exception):
    ① marker of extension from the side of, from (the side of) w. local sense preserved, used w. verbs of coming, going, sending, originating, going out, etc. (TestAbr A 2 p. 78, 30 [Stone p. 4] παρὰ τοῦ μεγάλου βασιλέως ἀπεστάλην; Lucian, Demon. 13 ἀπιὼν παρʼ αὐτοῦ) ἐκπορεύεσθαι J 15:26b. ἐξέρχεσθαι 16:27; 17:8; Lk 2:1; 6:19. ἔρχεσθαι 8:49. παραγίνεσθαι Mk 14:43. πέμπειν τινὰ παρά τινος J 15:26a. πνεύματος ἁγίου … παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς ἀποσταλέντος εἰς αὐτήν (=Μαρίαν) AcPlCor 2:5. εἶναι παρά τινος be from someone (cp. Job 21:2, 9) J 6:46; 7:29; 9:16, 33; 17:7.
    ② marker of one who originates or directs, from (Appian, Bell. Civ. 4, 100 §420 παρὰ τ. θεῶν; TestJob 38:8 παρὰ θεοῦ) παρὰ κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη this was the Lord’s doing Mt 21:42; Mk 12:11 (both Ps 117:23). W. a double negative: οὐκ ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ τ. θεοῦ πᾶν ῥῆμα (s. ἀδυνατέω) Lk 1:37. τὰ λελαλημένα αὐτῇ παρὰ κυρίου what was said to her (by the angel) at the Lord’s command vs. 45. ἀπεσταλμένος παρὰ θεοῦ John the Baptist was not, like Jesus, sent out fr. the very presence of God, but one whose coming was brought about by God J 1:6 (cp. 2 Macc 11:17). παρʼ ἑαυτῆς φέρει καρπὸν καὶ παρὰ τῆς πτελέας it (i.e. the vine) bears fruit which comes both from itself and from the elm Hs 2:3. On 2 Pt 2:11 s. κρίσις 1bβ.
    ③ marker of the point fr. which an action originates, from
    ⓐ after verbs
    α. of asking, demanding αἰτεῖν and αἰτεῖσθαι (cp. X., An. 1, 3, 16, Hell. 3, 1, 4; SIG 785, 9f; PFay 121, 12ff; Tob 4:19 BA al.; LXX; TestAbr A 9 p. 87, 2 [Stone p. 22]; TestJob 20:2; ParJer 7:14; Jos., Ant. 15, 92) Mt 20:20 v.l. (for ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ); J 4:9; Ac 3:2; 9:2; Js 1:5; 1J 5:15 v.l. (for ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ); 1 Cl 36:4 (Ps 2:8); Hm 9:2, 4; Dg 1. ζητεῖν (Tob 4:18; Sir 7:4; cp. 1 Macc 7:13) Mk 8:11; Lk 11:16; 12:48.
    β. of taking, accepting, receiving λαμβάνειν (class.; Appian, Mithrid. 88 §397; SIG 546 B, 23 [III B.C.]; Jdth 12:15; Sus 55 Theod.; 1 Macc 8:8; 11:34; 4 Macc 12:11; TestJob 11:5; JosAs 24:11; Just., A I, 39, 5 al.) Mk 12:2; Lk 6:34; J 5:34, 41, 44; 10:18; Ac 2:33; 3:5; 17:9; 20:24; 26:10 (Jos., Ant. 14, 167 λαβὼν ἐξουσίαν παρά σου [= τ. ἀρχιερέως]; 11, 169); Js 1:7; 2 Pt 1:17; 2J 4; Rv 2:28; Hs 1:8; 8, 3, 5; GJs 20, 2 codices. ἀπολαμβάνειν (SIG 150, 19f [restored text; IV B.C.]; 4 Macc 18:23) Hv 5:7. παραλαμβάνειν (Hdt. et al.; oft. ins; POxy 504, 14 al. in pap) Gal 1:12; 1 Th 2:13; 4:1; 2 Th 3:6. δέχεσθαι (Thu. 1, 20, 1 et al.; 1 Macc 15:20; TestJob 11:12; cp. διαδέχεσθαι Ath. 37, 1) Ac 22:5; Phil 4:18a. κομίζεσθαι (SIG 244 I, 5ff [IV B.C.]; Gen 38:20; 2 Macc 7:11; Ath. 12, 1) Eph 6:8. εὑρεῖν (SIG 537, 69; 1099, 28; cp. εὑρίσκω 3, end) 2 Ti 1:18. ἔχειν τι παρά τινος have received someth. fr. someone (1 Esdr 6:5) Ac 9:14; cp. Hv 3, 9, 8. γίνεταί μοί τι παρά τινος I receive someth. from someone (Att.) Mt 18:19. ἔσται μεθʼ ἡμῶν χάρις … παρὰ θεοῦ πατρὸς καὶ παρὰ Ἰησοῦ 2J 3 (cp. X., An. 7, 2, 25). οἱ πιστευθέντες παρὰ θεοῦ ἔργον those who were entrusted by God with a task 1 Cl 43:1 (cp. Polyb. 3, 69, 1; SIG 1207, 12f). παρὰ τοῦ κυρίου πλουτίζεσθαι receive one’s wealth fr. the Lord Hs 2:10.—Sim. in the case of a purchase the seller is introduced by παρά: buy fr. someone ἀγοράζειν (s. ἀγοράζω 1, end) Rv 3:18. ὠνεῖσθαι Ac 7:16. ἄρτον φαγεῖν παρά τινος receive support from someone 2 Th 3:8.
    γ. of learning, coming to know, hearing, asking ἀκούειν (s. ἀκούω 1bβ and 3) J 1:40; 6:45; 7:51; 8:26, 40; 15:15; Ac 10:22; 28:22; 2 Ti 1:13; 2:2; AcPlCor 1:6; ἀκριβοῦν Mt 2:7, 16. ἐξακριβάζεσθαι Hm 4, 2, 3. ἐπιγινώσκειν Ac 24:8. μανθάνειν (since Aeschyl., Ag. 858; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 176; Sir 8:8f; 2 Macc 7:2 v.l.; 3 Macc 1:1; Just., A I, 23, 1 and D. 78, 1 al.; Ath. 7, 2; 22, 8) 2 Ti 3:14. πυνθάνεσθαι (Hdt. 3, 68; X., Cyr. 1, 6, 23; Pla., Rep. 5, 476e; SIG 1169, 30; 2 Ch 32:31) Mt 2:4; J 4:52 (without παρά v.l.); B 13:2 (Gen 25:22).
    ⓑ w. adjectival function ὁ, ἡ, τὸ παρά τινος made, given, etc., by someone
    α. w. a noun (funct. as a gen.: Pla., Symp. 197e ὁ παρά τινος λόγος ‘the expression made by someone’; X., Hell. 3, 1, 6 δῶρον παρὰ βασιλέως, Mem. 2, 2, 12 ἡ παρά τινος εὔνοια, Cyr. 5, 5, 13 τὸ παρʼ ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα ‘the crime committed by me’; Polyb. 3, 69, 3 ἡ παρʼ αὐτοῦ σωτηρία; Polyaenus 3, 9, 28 ἡ παρὰ στρατηγοῦ ἀρετή; SIG 543, 27; Ex 4:20; 14:13; Philo, Plant. 14; Jos., Ant. 12, 400; Just., A I, 32, 8 and D. 92, 1 al.; Ath. 7, 1) ἡ παρʼ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη Ro 11:27 (Is 59:21).—Ac 26:12 v.l.; 22 v.l.
    β. w. subst. function
    א. τὰ παρά τινος what someone gives, someone’s gifts (X., Mem. 3, 11, 13; Jos., Bell. 2, 124, Ant. 8, 175; Tat. 32, 1 τὰ παρὰ θεοῦ) Lk 10:7; Phil 4:18b. τὰ παρʼ αὐτῆς her property, what she had Mk 5:26 (cp. IPriene 111, 177). τὰ παρὰ ζώσης καὶ μενούσης (the help that I received) from a living, contemporary voice Papias (2:4).
    ב. οἱ παρά τινος someone’s envoys (οἱ παρὰ βασιλέω πρέσβει X., Hell. 1, 3, 9; oft. in ins.: see, e.g., OGI 5, 50 from Ptolemy; the full expression οἱ παρʼ ὑμῶν πρεσβείς OGI 8 VI, 108–9; Schwyzer II 498; B-D-F §237, 2) οἱ παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως (1 Macc 2:15; 1 Esdr 1:15) 1 Cl 12:4.—The Koine also uses this expr. to denote others who are intimately connected w. someone, e.g. family, relatives (PGrenf II, 36, 9 [II B.C.]; POxy 805 [I B.C.]; 298, 37 [I A.D.]; CPR I, 179, 16; 187, 7; Sb 5238, 19 [I A.D.]; Sus 33; 1 Macc 13:52; Jos., Ant. 1, 193. Further exx. fr. pap in Mlt. 106f; Rossberg [s. ἀνά, beg.] 52) Mk 3:21 (s. CBruston/PFarel: RTQR 18, 1909, 82–93; AWabnitz, ibid. 221–25; SMonteil, ibid. 19, 1910, 317–25; JMoulton, Mk 3:21: ET 20, 1909, 476; GHartmann, Mk 3:20f: BZ 11, 1913, 248–79; FZorell, Zu Mk 3:20, 21: ZKT 37, 1913, 695–7; JBelser, Zu Mk 3:20f: TQ 98, 1916, 401–18; Rdm.2 141; 227.—S. also at ἐξίστημι 2a).
    B. w. dat., the case that exhibits close association
    ① marker of nearness in space, at/by (the side of), beside, near, with, acc. to the standpoint fr. which the relationship is viewed
    ⓐ near, beside
    α. w. things (Synes., Ep. 126 p. 262a; Kaibel 703, 1; POxy 120, 23; 2 Km 10:8; 11:9; Jos., Ant. 1, 196) εἱστήκεισαν παρὰ τῷ σταυρῷ J 19:25. κεῖσθαι παρὰ τῷ πύργῳ Hv 3, 5, 5.
    β. w. persons ἔστησεν αὐτὸ παρʼ ἑαυτῷ he had him (i.e. the child) stand by his side Lk 9:47.
    ⓑ in (someone’s) house, city, company, etc. (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 5 al. παρὰ Λάβαν)
    α. house: ἀριστᾶν Lk 11:37. καταλύειν 19:7 (Pla., Gorg. 447b; Demosth. 18, 82). μένειν (JosAs 20:8; Jos., Ant. 1, 298; 299) J 1:39; Ac 9:43; 18:3; 21:8. ξενίζεσθαι 10:6; 21:16 (ξενίζω 1). So prob. also ἕκαστος παρʼ ἑαυτῷ each one at home 1 Cor 16:2 (cp. Philo, Cher. 48 παρʼ ἑαυτοῖς, Leg. ad Gai. 271). ὸ̔ν ἀπέλιπον ἐν Τρῳάδι παρὰ Κάρπῳ 2 Ti 4:13.
    β. city: Rv 2:13. So prob. also ἦσαν παρʼ ἡμῖν ἑπτὰ ἀδελφοί Mt 22:25.—J 4:40; Col 4:16 (where the congregation at Laodicea is contrasted w. the one at Col.).
    γ. other uses: παρὰ Ἰουδαίοις among Judeans Mt 28:15. παρʼ αὐτοῖς ἐπιμεῖναι remain with them Ac 28:14; cp. 21:7. οἱ παρʼ ὑμῖν πρεσβύτεροι the elders among you 1 Cl 1:3.—παρὰ τῷ πατρί with (of spatial proximity) the Father Mt 6:1; J 8:38a; cp. 17:5 (Synes., Kingship 29 p. 31d: philosophy has her abode παρὰ τῷ θεῷ and if the world refuses to receive her when she descends to earth, μένει παρὰ τῷ πατρί). Of Jesus: παρʼ ὑμῖν μένων while I was with you (on earth) J 14:25. Of the Spirit: παρʼ ὑμῖν μένει vs. 17. Of the Father and Son in their relation to the faithful Christian: μονὴν παρʼ αὐτῷ ποιησόμεθα we will take up our abode with him vs. 23.
    δ. fig. παρά τινι before someone’s judgment seat (Demosth. 18, 13 εἰς κρίσιν καθιστάναι παρά τινι; Appian, Maced. 11 §8 παρʼ ὑμῖν ἐς κρίσιν) 2 Pt 2:11 v.l. Closely related is
    ② marker of one whose viewpoint is relevant, in the sight or judgment of someone (Soph., Hdt.; PSI 435, 19 [258 B.C.] παρὰ τῷ βασιλεῖ) παρὰ τῷ θεῷ: δίκαιος παρὰ τῷ θεῷ righteous in the sight of God Ro 2:13 (cp. Job 9:2; Jos., Ant. 6, 205; Ath. 31, 2 εὐδοξοῦμεν … παρὰ τῷ θεῷ).—Cp. 1 Cor 3:19; Gal 3:11; 2 Th 1:6; Js 1:27; 1 Pt 2:4; 2 Pt 3:8. θυσία δεκτὴ παρὰ τῷ θεῷ Hs 5, 3, 8. ἔνδοξος παρὰ τῷ θεῷ m 2:6; Hs 5, 3, 3; 8, 10, 1; 9, 27, 3; 9, 28, 3; 9, 29, 3.—9, 7, 6.—Acc. to the judgment of humans (Jos., Ant. 7, 84; Just., A I, 20, 3) 8, 9, 1. τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρʼ ὑμῖν; Ac 26:8. ἵνα μὴ ἦτε παρʼ ἑαυτοῖς φρόνιμοι Ro 11:25; cp. 12:16 (s. Pr 3:7 μὴ ἴσθι φρόνιμος παρὰ σεαυτῷ).—‘In the judgment’ passes over into a simpler with (PsSol 9:5 παρὰ κυρίῳ; Jos. Himerius, Or. 8 [=23], 10 παρὰ θεοῖς=with the gods) εὑρεῖν χάριν παρά τινι find favor with someone (Ex 33:16; cp. Num 11:15) Lk 1:30; Hs 5, 2, 10. τοῦτο χάρις παρὰ θεῷ 1 Pt 2:20. χάριν ἔχειν (Ex 33:12) m 5, 1, 5. προέκοπτεν ἐν τῇ χάριτι παρὰ θεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις Lk 2:52. τί ταπεινοφροσύνη παρὰ θεῷ ἰσχύει, τί ἀγάπη ἁγνὴ παρά θεῷ δύναται how strong humility is before God, what pure love before God can do 1 Cl 21:8.
    ③ marker of personal reference, at the side of, with almost equivalent to the dat. as such (Ps 75:13): δυνατόν or ἀδύνατον παρά τινι possible or impossible for someone (Gen 18:14; Just., A I, 33, 2; Ath., R. 9 p. 58, 6) Mt 19:26ab; Mk 10:27abc; Lk 1:37 v.l.; 18:27ab; 1 Cl 27:2.—AFridrichsen, SymbOsl 14, ’35, 44–46. Closely related in mng. is
    ④ marker of connection of a quality or characteristic w. a pers., with (οὐκ) ἔστιν τι παρά τινι someth. is (not) with or in someone, someone has someth. (nothing) to do w. someth. (Demosth. 18, 277 εἰ ἔστι καὶ παρʼ ἐμοί τις ἐμπειρία; Gen 24:25; Job 12:13; Ps 129:4 παρὰ σοι ὁ ἱλασμός ἐστιν; Just., D. 82, 1 παρὰ … ἡμῖν … χαρίσματα) οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολημψία παρὰ τ. θεῷ Ro 2:11 (TestJob 43, 13). Cp. 9:14; Eph 6:9; Js 1:17. Sim. Mt 8:10; 2 Cor 1:17.
    ⑤ marker of a relationship w. a narrow focus, among, before παρʼ ἑαυτοῖς among themselves (Philo, Cher. 48) διαλογίζεσθαι Mt 21:25 v.l. (cp. Demosth. 10, 17 γιγνώσκειν παρʼ αὑτῷ; Epict., Ench. 48, 2).—In ἐν τούτῳ μενέτω παρὰ θεῷ 1 Cor 7:24, the mng. of παρὰ θεῷ is not certain: let the pers. remain in that position (the same one in which he was when called to salvation) before God; it is prob. meant to remind Christians of the One before whom they cannot even have the appearance of inferiority (ins: Mitt-Wilck, I/2, 4, 4 [13 B.C.] παρὰ τῷ κυρίῳ Ἑρμῇ=‘before, in the sight of’; Sb 7616 [II A.D.] τὸ προσκύνημά σου ποιῶ παρὰ τῷ κυρίῳ Σαράπι=‘before the Lord’ S.; 7661, 3 [c. 100 A.D.]; 7932, 7992, 6 [letter II/III A.D.]). Or perh. it simply means that no matter what the situation may be, one is to be focused on God.
    C. w. acc. of pers. or thing
    ① marker of a position viewed as extended (w. no difference whether παρά answers the question ‘where?’ or ‘whither?’ See B-D-F §236, 1; Rob. 615).
    ⓐ by, along περιπατεῖν παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν (Pla., Gorg. 511e. Cp. SIG 1182; Jos., Ant. 2, 81) Mt 4:18; cp. Mk 1:16.
    α. παρὰ (τὴν) θάλασσαν by the sea (or lake) , at the shore Mt 13:1; Mk 4:1; 5:21; Ac 10:6, 32; cp. Lk 5:1, 2. παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν by the side of the road (X., An. 1, 2, 13; Plut., Lysander 450 [29, 4] a tomb παρὰ τ. ὁδόν=beside the road) Mt 20:30; Mk 10:46; Lk 18:35 (but on the road is also poss. in these three places; s. d below).
    β. παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν to (the side of) the sea (lake) Mt 15:29; Mk 2:13. παρὰ ποταμόν to the river Ac 16:13.
    ⓒ gener. near, at παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τινός at someone’s feet (sit, fall, place etc.; TestAbr A 17 p. 98, 16 [Stone p. 44]) Mt 15:30; Lk 7:38; 8:35, 41; 10:39 v.l.; 17:16; Ac 4:35, 37 v.l.; 5:2; 7:58; 22:3 (s. ET 30, 1919, 39f). παρὰ τὸν πὺργον beside the tower Hs 9, 4, 8; 9, 6, 5; 8; 9, 7, 1; 9, 11, 6.—παρὰ τὴν ἰτέαν 8, 1, 2 (cp. TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 10 [Stone p. 14] παρὰ τὴν δρῦν τὴν Μαμβρῆ).
    ⓓ on παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν on the road (w. motion implied; Aesop, Fab. 226 P.=420 H.: πεσὼν παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν; Phot., Bibl. 94 p. 74b on Iambl. Erot. [Hercher I p. 222, 22] πίπτουσι παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν) Mt 13:4, 19; Mk 4:4; Lk 8:5; on the road (w. no motion implied; Theophr., HP 6, 6, 10: the crocus likes to be trodden under foot, διὸ καὶ παρὰ τὰς ὁδοὺς κάλλιστος; Phot. p. 222, 29 H. [s. above]) Mk 4:15; Lk 8:12. Perh. also Mt 20:30; Mk 10:46; Lk 18:35 (s. bα above).—παρὰ τὸ χεῖλος τῆς θαλάσσης on the seashore Hb 11:12 (TestAbr A 1 p. 78, 1 [Stone p. 4]; ApcEsdr 3:10; ApcSed 8:9).
    ② marker of extension in time, during, from … to (Lucian, Catapl. 24 παρὰ τ. βίον=during his life; POxy 472, 10; TestAbr A 20 p. 102, 26 [Stone p. 52] παρὰ μίαν ὥραν; Tat. 14, 2 παρʼ ὸ̔ν ἔζων χρόνον) παρʼ ἐνιαυτόν from year to year (Plut., Cleom. 15, 1; cp. ἐνιαυτός 1) B 10:7.
    ③ marker of comparative advantage, in comparison to, more than, beyond ἁμαρτωλοί, ὀφειλέται π. πάντας Lk 13:2, 4 (PSI 317, 6 [95 A.D.] παρὰ πάντας; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 234 παρὰ τ. ἄλλους ἅπαντας; JosAs 10:6 παρὰ πάσας τὰς παρθένους; Just., A I, 20, 3 παρὰ πάντας ἀδίκως μισούμεθα). κρίνειν ἡμέραν παρʼ ἡμέραν (s. κρίνω 1) Ro 14:5. π. πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν B 11:9 (prophetic quot. of unknown orig.). π. πάντα τὰ πνεύματα more than all other spirits Hm 10, 1, 2. ἐλαττοῦν τινα π. τινα make someone inferior to someone Hb 2:7, 9 (s. ἐλαττόω 1 and cp. PGrenf I, 42, 12 [II B.C.] ἐλαττουμένων ἡμῶν παρὰ τοὺς δεῖνα). εἶδος ἐκλεῖπον π. τὸ εἶδος τῶν ἀνθρώπων (s. ἐκλείπω 4) 1 Cl 16:3.—After a comp. (Thu. 1, 23, 3; ApcEsdr 1:22; Tat. 2, 2) Lk 3:13; Hb 1:4; 3:3; 9:23; 11:4; 12:24; B 4:5 (cp. Da 7:7); Hv 3, 12, 1; Hs 9, 18, 2.—When a comparison is made, one member of it may receive so little attention as to pass fr. consideration entirely, so that ‘more than’ becomes instead of, rather than, to the exclusion of (Plut., Mor. 984c; PsSol 9:9; EpArist 134; Just., A I, 22, 2) λατρεύειν τῇ κτίσει παρὰ τὸν κτίσαντα serve the creation rather than the Creator Ro 1:25 (cp. EpArist 139: the Jews worship τὸν μόνον θεὸν παρʼ ὅλην τὴν κτίσιν). δεδικαιωμένος παρʼ ἐκεῖνον justified rather than the other Lk 18:14. ἔχρισέν σε … παρὰ τοὺς μετόχους (God) has anointed you and not your comrades Hb 1:9 (Ps 44:8). ὑπερφρονεῖν παρʼ ὸ̔ δεῖ φρονεῖν Ro 12:3 (Plut., Mor. 83f παρʼ ὸ̔ δεῖ). παρὰ καιρὸν ἡλικίας Hb 11:11 (Plut., Rom. 25, 6 παρʼ ἡλικίαν; cp. ἡλικία 2a).—παρὰ δύναμιν beyond their means (s. δύναμις 2) 2 Cor 8:3.—After ἄλλος (Pla., Lach. 178b, Leg. 3, 693b; X., Hell. 1, 5, 5; Demosth. 18, 235) another than 1 Cor 3:11.
    ④ marker of degree that falls slightly short in comparison, except for, almost παρὰ μικρόν except for a little, almost (s. μικρός 1eγ) Hs 8, 1, 14. Likew. παρά τι (cp. Vett. Val. 228, 6) Lk 5:7 D; Hs 9, 19, 3.
    ⑤ marker of causality, because of (cp. Pind., O. 2, 65 κενεὰν παρὰ δίαιταν ‘in the interest of’ or ‘for the sake of a scanty livelihood’, the scantiness here contrasting with the immense labor involved; Demosth. 4, 11; 9, 2; PRyl 243, 6; POxy 1420, 7) παρὰ τό w. acc. foll. because (SIG 495, 130; UPZ 7, 13 [163 B.C.] παρὰ τὸ Ἕλληνά με εἶναι.—Mayser II/1, 1926, 331; Gen 29:20; Ex 14:11) 1 Cl 39:5f (Job 4:20f). π. τοῦτο because of this (Kühner-G. I 513, 3; Synes., Ep. 44 p. 185a; 57 p. 192d) ITr 5:2; IRo 5:1 (quot. fr. 1 Cor 4:4, where Paul has ἐν τούτῳ). οὐ παρὰ τοῦτο οὐ (double neg. as a strengthened affirmative) not for that reason any the less 1 Cor 12:15f.
    ⑥ marker of that which does not correspond to what is expected, against, contrary to (Hom., Alc. et al.; ins, pap, LXX; Just., Tat., Ath.—Schwyzer II 497) π. τὴν διδαχήν Ro 16:17. παρʼ ἐλπίδα against hope (s. ἐλπίς 1a) in wordplay w. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι 4:18. παρὰ φύσιν (Thu. 6, 17, 1; Pla., Rep. 5, 466d; Tat. 22, 2; Ath. 26, 2, R. 6 p. 54, 13) 1:26; 11:24. παρὰ τὸν νόμον (Just., A II, 2, 4; Ath. 1, 3; cp. X., Mem. 1, 1, 18 παρὰ τοὺς νόμους; PMagd 16, 5 [222 B.C.] παρὰ τοὺς νόμους; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 233; Just., A I, 68, 10) Ac 18:13. παρʼ ὅ contrary to that which Gal 1:8f (Just., A I, 43, 8).
    ⑦ marker of something that is less, less (Hdt. 9, 33; Plut., Caesar 722 [30, 5]; Jos., Ant. 4, 176; POxy 264, 4 [I A.D.]) τεσσεράκοντα παρὰ μίαν forty less one=thirty-nine (i.e. lashes) 2 Cor 11:24 (cp. Makkoth 3, 10 [tr. HDanby, The Mishnah ’33, 407]).—On παρʼ αὐτά ITr 11:1 s. παραυτά.—DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > παρά

  • 12 adjuncta

    ad-jungo, nxi, nctum, 3, v. a., to add, join, annex, or bind to any thing.
    I.
    Lit., of cattle, to yoke, to harness (cf.:

    jugo, jugum, jungo, etc.): adjunxere feras (preceded by bijugos agitare leones),

    Lucr. 2, 604:

    tauros aratro,

    Tib. 1, 9, 7:

    plostello mures,

    Hor. S. 2, 3, 247:

    tigribus adjunctis aurea lora dabat,

    Ov. A. A. 1, 552; so id. Am. 1, 1, 26; Gell. 20, 1.—Hence,
    II.
    Transf.
    A.
    Of persons or things, to join or add to. —With ad or dat.:

    ad probos te adjunxeris,

    Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 59;

    where the figure of yoking is closely adhered to (v. the connection): adjunge te ad currum,

    Vulg. Act. 8, 29:

    socium quaerit, quem adjungat sibi,

    Plaut. As. 2, 2, 22:

    comitem T. Volturcium,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 4:

    se comitem fugae,

    id. Att. 9, 10, 2:

    ei proxime adjunctus frater fuit,

    id. Brut. 28:

    viro se,

    Verg. A. 8, 13:

    adjuncti sunt Paulo et Silae,

    Vulg. Act. 17, 4:

    accessionem aedibus,

    Cic. Off. 1, 39:

    ulmis vites,

    Verg. G. 1, 2:

    classem lateri castrorum,

    id. A. 9, 69; so esp. freq. of places, lying near, adjacent:

    huic fundo continentia quaedam praedia et adjuncta mercatur,

    Cic. Caec. 4; Nep. Dion. 5; Curt. 8, 1; cf. id. 5, 4; Sil. 8, 642.— Trop.: ad malam aetatem adjungere cruciatum, Pac. ap. Non. 2, 1:

    imperium credat gravius esse, vi quod fit, quam illud quod amicitia adjungitur,

    the command which is put upon him, given him, with kind feeling, Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 42.—Hence, adjungere aliquem sibi, to bind to one's self, to enter into friendship with, to make one a friend:

    familiam colere, adjuvare, adjungere,

    Ter. Ad. 5, 8, 4; Cic. Mur. 19; so Q. Cic. Pet. 7; Nep. Alc. 5, 9; id. Eum. 2; so,

    agros populo Romano,

    Cic. Agr. 1, 2:

    totam ad imperium pop. R. Ciliciam,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 12, 35:

    urbem in societatem,

    Liv. 37, 15: sibi aliquem beneficio, to lay one under obligation to one's self, to oblige:

    quem beneficio adjungas,

    Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 47;

    also without beneficio: ut parentes propinquosque eorum adjungeret,

    Tac. A. 3, 43.—
    B.
    Met. of mental objects, to apply to, to direct to (very freq. and class.):

    animum ad aliquod studium,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 29:

    fidem visis,

    to give credit to, Cic. Ac. 1, 11; id. Div. 2, 55:

    huc animum ut adjungas tuum,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 61:

    diligentia vestra nobis adjungenda est,

    Cic. Clu. 1:

    ut aliquis metus adjunctus sit ad gratiam,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 7, 24:

    suspicionem potius ad praedam quam ad egestatem,

    to direct suspicion rather to him who possesses the booty, than to him who lives in poverty, id. Rosc. Am. 31.—
    C.
    To add or join something to a thing as an accompaniment, to annex, to subjoin, to let follow or attend: audi atque auditis hostimentum adjungito, hear and let requital follow what is heard, Enn. ap. Fest. s. v. redhostire, p. 270 Müll. (Trag. v. 154 Vahl.):

    huic voluptati hoc adjunctum est odium,

    Plaut. Curc. 1, 3, 34:

    istam juris scientiam eloquentiae tamquam ancillulam pedisequamque adjunxisti,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 55, 236.— Hence of a new thought or circumstance, to add it to the preceding:

    quod cum dicerem, illud adjunxi: mihi tecum ita, etc.,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 2:

    satis erit dictum, si hoc unum adjunxero,

    Nep. Epam. 10:

    His adjungit, Hylan nautae quo fonte relictum Clamassent,

    Verg. E. 6, 43 (v. addo, adjicio, etc.):

    ad ceteras summas utilitates, haec quoque opportunitas adjungatur, ut, etc.,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 17, 50:

    Adjuncto vero, ut iidem etiam prudentes haberentur,

    id. Off. 2, 12.—Hence,
    D.
    In rhet.: adjuncta, n., collateral circumstances:

    loci argumentorum ex adjunctis repeti possunt, ut quaeratur, quid ante rem, quid cum re, quid postea evenerit,

    Cic. Top. 12; so id. ib. 18; cf. consequens.—Hence, adjunctus, a, um, P. a.
    A.
    Joined, added to, or connected with a thing:

    quae propiora hujus causae et adjunctiora sunt,

    Cic. Clu. 10:

    ventum ad veram et adjunctissimam quaestionem,

    Arn. 7, p. 243.—Hence,
    B.
    adjuncta, ōrum, n., additional circumstances, adjuncts, things closely connected with, belonging or suitable to:

    semper in adjunctis aevoque morabimur aptis,

    Hor. A. P. 178.— Adv. not used.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adjuncta

  • 13 adjunctus

    ad-jungo, nxi, nctum, 3, v. a., to add, join, annex, or bind to any thing.
    I.
    Lit., of cattle, to yoke, to harness (cf.:

    jugo, jugum, jungo, etc.): adjunxere feras (preceded by bijugos agitare leones),

    Lucr. 2, 604:

    tauros aratro,

    Tib. 1, 9, 7:

    plostello mures,

    Hor. S. 2, 3, 247:

    tigribus adjunctis aurea lora dabat,

    Ov. A. A. 1, 552; so id. Am. 1, 1, 26; Gell. 20, 1.—Hence,
    II.
    Transf.
    A.
    Of persons or things, to join or add to. —With ad or dat.:

    ad probos te adjunxeris,

    Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 59;

    where the figure of yoking is closely adhered to (v. the connection): adjunge te ad currum,

    Vulg. Act. 8, 29:

    socium quaerit, quem adjungat sibi,

    Plaut. As. 2, 2, 22:

    comitem T. Volturcium,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 4:

    se comitem fugae,

    id. Att. 9, 10, 2:

    ei proxime adjunctus frater fuit,

    id. Brut. 28:

    viro se,

    Verg. A. 8, 13:

    adjuncti sunt Paulo et Silae,

    Vulg. Act. 17, 4:

    accessionem aedibus,

    Cic. Off. 1, 39:

    ulmis vites,

    Verg. G. 1, 2:

    classem lateri castrorum,

    id. A. 9, 69; so esp. freq. of places, lying near, adjacent:

    huic fundo continentia quaedam praedia et adjuncta mercatur,

    Cic. Caec. 4; Nep. Dion. 5; Curt. 8, 1; cf. id. 5, 4; Sil. 8, 642.— Trop.: ad malam aetatem adjungere cruciatum, Pac. ap. Non. 2, 1:

    imperium credat gravius esse, vi quod fit, quam illud quod amicitia adjungitur,

    the command which is put upon him, given him, with kind feeling, Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 42.—Hence, adjungere aliquem sibi, to bind to one's self, to enter into friendship with, to make one a friend:

    familiam colere, adjuvare, adjungere,

    Ter. Ad. 5, 8, 4; Cic. Mur. 19; so Q. Cic. Pet. 7; Nep. Alc. 5, 9; id. Eum. 2; so,

    agros populo Romano,

    Cic. Agr. 1, 2:

    totam ad imperium pop. R. Ciliciam,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 12, 35:

    urbem in societatem,

    Liv. 37, 15: sibi aliquem beneficio, to lay one under obligation to one's self, to oblige:

    quem beneficio adjungas,

    Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 47;

    also without beneficio: ut parentes propinquosque eorum adjungeret,

    Tac. A. 3, 43.—
    B.
    Met. of mental objects, to apply to, to direct to (very freq. and class.):

    animum ad aliquod studium,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 29:

    fidem visis,

    to give credit to, Cic. Ac. 1, 11; id. Div. 2, 55:

    huc animum ut adjungas tuum,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 61:

    diligentia vestra nobis adjungenda est,

    Cic. Clu. 1:

    ut aliquis metus adjunctus sit ad gratiam,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 7, 24:

    suspicionem potius ad praedam quam ad egestatem,

    to direct suspicion rather to him who possesses the booty, than to him who lives in poverty, id. Rosc. Am. 31.—
    C.
    To add or join something to a thing as an accompaniment, to annex, to subjoin, to let follow or attend: audi atque auditis hostimentum adjungito, hear and let requital follow what is heard, Enn. ap. Fest. s. v. redhostire, p. 270 Müll. (Trag. v. 154 Vahl.):

    huic voluptati hoc adjunctum est odium,

    Plaut. Curc. 1, 3, 34:

    istam juris scientiam eloquentiae tamquam ancillulam pedisequamque adjunxisti,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 55, 236.— Hence of a new thought or circumstance, to add it to the preceding:

    quod cum dicerem, illud adjunxi: mihi tecum ita, etc.,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 2:

    satis erit dictum, si hoc unum adjunxero,

    Nep. Epam. 10:

    His adjungit, Hylan nautae quo fonte relictum Clamassent,

    Verg. E. 6, 43 (v. addo, adjicio, etc.):

    ad ceteras summas utilitates, haec quoque opportunitas adjungatur, ut, etc.,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 17, 50:

    Adjuncto vero, ut iidem etiam prudentes haberentur,

    id. Off. 2, 12.—Hence,
    D.
    In rhet.: adjuncta, n., collateral circumstances:

    loci argumentorum ex adjunctis repeti possunt, ut quaeratur, quid ante rem, quid cum re, quid postea evenerit,

    Cic. Top. 12; so id. ib. 18; cf. consequens.—Hence, adjunctus, a, um, P. a.
    A.
    Joined, added to, or connected with a thing:

    quae propiora hujus causae et adjunctiora sunt,

    Cic. Clu. 10:

    ventum ad veram et adjunctissimam quaestionem,

    Arn. 7, p. 243.—Hence,
    B.
    adjuncta, ōrum, n., additional circumstances, adjuncts, things closely connected with, belonging or suitable to:

    semper in adjunctis aevoque morabimur aptis,

    Hor. A. P. 178.— Adv. not used.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adjunctus

  • 14 adjungo

    ad-jungo, nxi, nctum, 3, v. a., to add, join, annex, or bind to any thing.
    I.
    Lit., of cattle, to yoke, to harness (cf.:

    jugo, jugum, jungo, etc.): adjunxere feras (preceded by bijugos agitare leones),

    Lucr. 2, 604:

    tauros aratro,

    Tib. 1, 9, 7:

    plostello mures,

    Hor. S. 2, 3, 247:

    tigribus adjunctis aurea lora dabat,

    Ov. A. A. 1, 552; so id. Am. 1, 1, 26; Gell. 20, 1.—Hence,
    II.
    Transf.
    A.
    Of persons or things, to join or add to. —With ad or dat.:

    ad probos te adjunxeris,

    Plaut. Aul. 2, 2, 59;

    where the figure of yoking is closely adhered to (v. the connection): adjunge te ad currum,

    Vulg. Act. 8, 29:

    socium quaerit, quem adjungat sibi,

    Plaut. As. 2, 2, 22:

    comitem T. Volturcium,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 4:

    se comitem fugae,

    id. Att. 9, 10, 2:

    ei proxime adjunctus frater fuit,

    id. Brut. 28:

    viro se,

    Verg. A. 8, 13:

    adjuncti sunt Paulo et Silae,

    Vulg. Act. 17, 4:

    accessionem aedibus,

    Cic. Off. 1, 39:

    ulmis vites,

    Verg. G. 1, 2:

    classem lateri castrorum,

    id. A. 9, 69; so esp. freq. of places, lying near, adjacent:

    huic fundo continentia quaedam praedia et adjuncta mercatur,

    Cic. Caec. 4; Nep. Dion. 5; Curt. 8, 1; cf. id. 5, 4; Sil. 8, 642.— Trop.: ad malam aetatem adjungere cruciatum, Pac. ap. Non. 2, 1:

    imperium credat gravius esse, vi quod fit, quam illud quod amicitia adjungitur,

    the command which is put upon him, given him, with kind feeling, Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 42.—Hence, adjungere aliquem sibi, to bind to one's self, to enter into friendship with, to make one a friend:

    familiam colere, adjuvare, adjungere,

    Ter. Ad. 5, 8, 4; Cic. Mur. 19; so Q. Cic. Pet. 7; Nep. Alc. 5, 9; id. Eum. 2; so,

    agros populo Romano,

    Cic. Agr. 1, 2:

    totam ad imperium pop. R. Ciliciam,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 12, 35:

    urbem in societatem,

    Liv. 37, 15: sibi aliquem beneficio, to lay one under obligation to one's self, to oblige:

    quem beneficio adjungas,

    Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 47;

    also without beneficio: ut parentes propinquosque eorum adjungeret,

    Tac. A. 3, 43.—
    B.
    Met. of mental objects, to apply to, to direct to (very freq. and class.):

    animum ad aliquod studium,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 29:

    fidem visis,

    to give credit to, Cic. Ac. 1, 11; id. Div. 2, 55:

    huc animum ut adjungas tuum,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 4, 61:

    diligentia vestra nobis adjungenda est,

    Cic. Clu. 1:

    ut aliquis metus adjunctus sit ad gratiam,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 7, 24:

    suspicionem potius ad praedam quam ad egestatem,

    to direct suspicion rather to him who possesses the booty, than to him who lives in poverty, id. Rosc. Am. 31.—
    C.
    To add or join something to a thing as an accompaniment, to annex, to subjoin, to let follow or attend: audi atque auditis hostimentum adjungito, hear and let requital follow what is heard, Enn. ap. Fest. s. v. redhostire, p. 270 Müll. (Trag. v. 154 Vahl.):

    huic voluptati hoc adjunctum est odium,

    Plaut. Curc. 1, 3, 34:

    istam juris scientiam eloquentiae tamquam ancillulam pedisequamque adjunxisti,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 55, 236.— Hence of a new thought or circumstance, to add it to the preceding:

    quod cum dicerem, illud adjunxi: mihi tecum ita, etc.,

    Cic. Fam. 5, 2:

    satis erit dictum, si hoc unum adjunxero,

    Nep. Epam. 10:

    His adjungit, Hylan nautae quo fonte relictum Clamassent,

    Verg. E. 6, 43 (v. addo, adjicio, etc.):

    ad ceteras summas utilitates, haec quoque opportunitas adjungatur, ut, etc.,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 17, 50:

    Adjuncto vero, ut iidem etiam prudentes haberentur,

    id. Off. 2, 12.—Hence,
    D.
    In rhet.: adjuncta, n., collateral circumstances:

    loci argumentorum ex adjunctis repeti possunt, ut quaeratur, quid ante rem, quid cum re, quid postea evenerit,

    Cic. Top. 12; so id. ib. 18; cf. consequens.—Hence, adjunctus, a, um, P. a.
    A.
    Joined, added to, or connected with a thing:

    quae propiora hujus causae et adjunctiora sunt,

    Cic. Clu. 10:

    ventum ad veram et adjunctissimam quaestionem,

    Arn. 7, p. 243.—Hence,
    B.
    adjuncta, ōrum, n., additional circumstances, adjuncts, things closely connected with, belonging or suitable to:

    semper in adjunctis aevoque morabimur aptis,

    Hor. A. P. 178.— Adv. not used.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adjungo

См. также в других словарях:

  • Northern Combat Area Command — The Northern Combat Area Command or NCAC was a mainly Sino American formation that held the northern end of the Allied front in Burma during World War II. For much of its existence it was commanded by the acerbic General Joseph Vinegar Joe… …   Wikipedia

  • Private Fears in Public Places — Infobox Play name = Private Fears in Public Places writer = Alan Ayckbourn characters = Nicola Stewart Dan Ambrose Charlotte Imogen Arthur (voice only) setting = Various homes, bars and workplaces premiere = 17 August 2004 place = Stephen Joseph… …   Wikipedia

  • United States Special Operations Command — Infobox Military Unit unit name= United States Special Operations Command caption= United States Special Operations Command emblem dates= April 16, 1987 country= United States allegiance= branch= type= Special Operations role= Provide fully… …   Wikipedia

  • History of Egypt under the Muhammad Ali dynasty — The history of Egypt under the Muhammad Ali Pasha dynasty was a period of rapid reform and modernization that led to Egypt becoming one of the most developed states outside of Europe. It also led to massive government expenditures, that ended up… …   Wikipedia

  • GDI characters of Command & Conquer — This page lists the characters of the Global Defense Initiative, one of the primary factions in the Tiberian series of Westwood Studios popular Command Conquer series of computer and video games. Contents 1 Tiberian Dawn 1.1 Brigadier General… …   Wikipedia

  • Characters of His Dark Materials — The following is a list of both main and minor characters from Philip Pullman s His Dark Materials trilogy. Main charactersLyra Belacqua/SilvertongueLyra Belacqya (pronounced Lie ruh), who adopts the surname Silvertongue given to her by Iorek… …   Wikipedia

  • List of His Dark Materials characters — The following is a list of both main and minor characters from Philip Pullman s His Dark Materials trilogy. Contents 1 Main characters 1.1 Lyra Belacqua/Silvertongue 1.2 Will Parry 1.3 …   Wikipedia

  • Minor places in Beleriand — Middle earth portal J. R. R. Tolkien s Middle earth legendarium contains many locations. Some of the minor places in the region of Beleriand during the First Age are described below. It is to be supposed that all of them were destroyed in the… …   Wikipedia

  • List of You're Under Arrest characters — The following are fictional characters that have appeared in the You re Under Arrest franchise. NOTOC Contents Main charactersNatsumi TsujimotoMiyuki KobayakawaBokuto Police OfficersA motorcycle patrol officer stationed in Bokuto Precinct who is… …   Wikipedia

  • W.T. Sherman: Orders to His Army — ▪ Primary Source       Headquarters Military Division of the Mississippi, in the Field, Kingston, Georgia, November 8, 1864.       The general commanding deems it proper at this time to inform the officers and men of the Fourteenth, Fifteenth,… …   Universalium

  • National Register of Historic Places listings in Wayne County, Michigan — The white areas represent unincorporated charter and civil townships. The gray areas represent incorporated cities and villages …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»